JP2018157979A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a performance effect.SOLUTION: A second segment unit 620 comprises a reflection member 625 for reflecting light emitted from an LED 624a to a back surface of a light transmission member 621. Therefore, a board member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted is in a state of being orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmission member 621. Therefore, an area on a back surface side of the second segment unit 620 can be secured. On right and left back surface sides of the second segment unit 620, a decorative pattern display device 800 is provided, so that arrangements between the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display devices 800 can be approached. Therefore, a performance effect produced by the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display devices 800 can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a rotating cylinder that is formed to be rotatable and arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and at least a part of which is disposed between the rotating cylinders. A decorative member having light permeability and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted are provided, and the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine in which a board is arranged in a posture is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-5927 A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the effect is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured such that a rotating drum and a plurality of rotating drums arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval are arranged between the rotating drums. Provided with a decorative member having at least a part of light transmittance, and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted. The substrate is disposed in a posture substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, and includes a reflective member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum and overlaps with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in a front view. The outer edge is extended to the position.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the reflecting member connects a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted on the substrate and a back surface of the decorative member, thereby emitting light on the substrate. Surrounding the region where the means is mounted and the region where the pattern on the decorative member is formed, the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member toward the substrate. Is done.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, it is possible to easily form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. It is a perspective front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, (b) is a rear view of the winning unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a base member and a 1st electrically-driven accessory. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a drive unit and a 1st electrically-driven accessory. (A) And (b) is a front view of a drive unit and a 1st electrically-driven accessory. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the winning opening unit 500 in the XVII-XVII line of Fig.10 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. 18A is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the winning hole unit along line XXb-XXb in FIG. is there. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. FIG. 22A is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIa in FIG. 21A, and FIG. 21B is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIb in FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a left wing member, (b) is a front perspective view of a right wing member. (A) is a front view of a winning opening unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the winning a prize mouth unit in range XXVIII of Drawing 27 (b). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in a range XXIX in FIG. 2. (A) is a front view of the decorative symbol display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a decoration symbol display apparatus. (A) is the front view which expand | deployed the inner reel, (b) is the front view which expand | deployed the outer reel. It is sectional drawing of the decorative design display apparatus in the XXXIV-XXXIV line | wire of Fig.30 (a). It is the elements on larger scale of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the range XXXV of FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line | wire of Fig.36 (a). It is a front view of a segment display device. It is an exploded view of a segment display device. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a 2nd segment unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd segment unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd segment unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd segment unit in the XLV-XLV line | wire of Fig.42 (a). It is a side view of a base member. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd seg unit in the XLVII-XLVII line of Fig.42 (a). It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a displacement member, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of the displacement member in the LIII-LIII line | wire of Fig.51 (a). It is a front view of a displacement member. It is a front view of a segment display device and a decorative design display device. It is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative design display device. (A) to (c) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57 (a). (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57 (a). (A) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57 (a). It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the rotation member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of an outer reel unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit in the LXVIb-LXVIb line | wire of Fig.66 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line | wire of Fig.68 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of an annular member, (b) is sectional drawing of the annular member in the LXXb-LXXb line | wire of Fig.70 (a). It is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a rotation member, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation member in the LXXIIb-LXXIIb line | wire of Fig.72 (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of an outer reel unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit in the LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb line | wire of Fig.73 (a). (A) is a front view of the rotation member in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotation member. (A) to (c) is a side view of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (A) to (c) is a front view of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 8th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the drive unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st electrically-driven accessory and a drive unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is a front view of the displacement member in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a displacement member. It is sectional drawing of a vertical displacement unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the vertical displacement unit in the range XCI of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of the vertical displacement unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. It is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit in the line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a top view of the winning opening unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96 (a). (A) is a perspective front view of the left wing member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of a right wing member. (A) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the left wing member in the XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb line of FIG. 98 (a), (c) is FIG. 98 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the right wing member in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 15th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the XCIXb-XCIXb line | wire of FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of a game board, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the Cb-Cb line | wire of Fig.100 (a). (A) is a front view of the 1st electric combination and drive unit in a 16th embodiment, (b) is a section of the 1st electric combination and drive unit 8530 in the (a) CIb-CIb line of Drawing 101 (a). It is a figure and (c) is sectional drawing of the 1st electrically-driven accessory and drive unit in the CIc-CIc line | wire of FIG. 101 (b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the 1st electrically-driven accessory and drive unit in 17th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a winning opening unit. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the rotating member in 18th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the rotating member in the CVb-CVb line | wire of Fig.105 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the decoration symbol display apparatus in 18th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 63, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used when, for example, the aspect of the effect displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the effect of super reach is changed. It is operated by a person.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to a winning in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time that the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric accessory 520 is in an opened state (open state), the second winning a prize port 140 is compared with a case where the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during a short period of time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times the first electric accessory 520 is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is not changed during the time when the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that 520 opens. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the first electric accessory 520 associated with the second winning opening 140 and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 520 per one time are not changed. Only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal probability.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 as a trigger (start winning). A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of a segment display device 600 and a decorative symbol display device 800 that perform variable display of symbols, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. )).

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  In the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display and the displacement operation corresponding to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are performed. Instead of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, for example, a gaming state may be displayed using a liquid crystal display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  When the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the pachinko machine 10 has the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric accessory 520 of the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  It is to be noted that the second prize opening during the probability change or in the short time may be increased by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or in the short time, or increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the first electric accessory 520 per time. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the ball to 140, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 520 may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the segment display. A part of the device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  A first electric combination 520 is attached to the second winning prize opening 140. The first electric accessory 520 is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 520 is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 520 is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 520 is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 520 as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where the ball can be always won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 520 attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is allowed to pass. Thus, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 520 and aim to win 15R probability change by winning the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, thereby indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. It is. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Perform the main processing.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800, such as display) and the notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines and determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110. The display mode is notified to the display control device 114 by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player. Or the display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the displayed mode is changed, information about the displayed mode after the change is included in order to display the decoration according to the displayed mode after the change on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. A rear image change command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 from the display control device 114. In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. Further, lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600, and the decorative symbol display device 800. Based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 includes the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. It controls the display of the 3rd symbol variation effect and the like. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby displaying the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 and the sound from the sound output device 226. The output can be combined.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 13, a state where the winning opening unit 500 is disassembled from the game board 13 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the winning opening unit 500 is a game formed by being partitioned by two rails 76 and 77 planted on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. It is inserted and arranged from the front side into an opening 13a formed below the region. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described later.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300. FIG.

  In FIG. 8, the state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 disposed on the segment display device 600 are retracted on both the upper and lower sides is shown in FIG. The state where the provided displacement member 670 is projected to the center position in the vertical direction is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the operation unit 300 includes a back case 400 formed in a box shape, and a decorative symbol display device 800, a segment display device 600, and a decoration unit 700 are provided in the inner space of the back case 400. Is housed.

  The back case 400 includes a bottom wall 401 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall 402 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 401 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 401 is formed with an opening 401a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the segment display device 600 is disposed from the back side of the back case 400 through the opening 401a.

  Three decorative symbol display devices 800 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction in the opening 401 a in the bottom wall 401 of the back case 400. The decorative symbol display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that are rotationally displaced in the vertical direction, and are decorated on the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the symbol fluctuates (rotates). A detailed description of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described later.

  The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall 401 of the back case 400 and covers the decorative symbol display device 800. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is disposed between the gaps, so that the player side The decorative symbol display device 800 can be visually recognized.

  Further, the segment display device 600 is provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the opposing base members 660 described above. The displacement member 670 is disposed on the decorative symbol display device 800. By displacing forward, it is possible to form an effect that makes the decorative symbol display device 800 invisible from the player side. A detailed description of the segment display device 600 will be described later.

  The decoration units 700 are formed in a box shape having a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a pair of the decoration units 700 are arranged above and below the segment display device 600. The decoration unit 700 is formed of a transparent resin material and has a shape imitating a logo, a title, or the like of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, an LED base for irradiating light is disposed inside the decoration unit 700, and is formed so as to be able to irradiate the player side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29, the winning opening unit 500 will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13, the configuration of the winning opening unit 500 will be described.

  FIG. 10A is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 10B is a rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first electric accessory 520.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the winning opening unit 500 includes a base member 510 disposed on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 5), and a shaft that is rotatable inside the base member 510. The first electric combination 520 to be supported and a drive unit 530 that applies a driving force to the first electric combination 520 are mainly provided.

  The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 disposed on the front side and a back base 512 disposed at a predetermined interval from the front base 511.

  The front base 511 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is formed from a transparent resin material. The front base 511 includes a first protrusion 511a that protrudes from the upper end of the center in the left-right direction to the back side, a second protrusion 511b that protrudes from the lower end to the back in the center of the left-right direction, and a second protrusion thereof. 511b and a third projecting portion 511c projecting to a position with a predetermined gap in the left-right direction are mainly provided.

  Also. The front base 511 is disposed at a position where the front surface is visible from the player side, and a pattern is formed on the front surface side by unevenness.

  The first protrusion 511a is formed on the back base 512 when a first electric accessory 520 (described later) is in a closed state (the tip of the wing members 520L and 520R is positioned above the rotation shaft (shaft member JB1)). This is a plate member for preventing game balls from being sent to the second winning opening 140 formed.

  That is, the first projecting portion 511a is formed at an upper portion between the opposed pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric accessory 520 and the first projecting portion 511a is the diameter of the game ball. Is set smaller.

  The first protrusion 511a is formed such that the upper surface of the first protrusion 511a is inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper part of the 1st protrusion part 511a can roll the upper surface, and can fall (flow down) below.

  The second projecting portion 511b is formed to project in a horizontally long rectangular shape from the back side of the front base 511, and the vertical position of the upper end surface thereof is lower than the bottom surface of the second winning port 140 of the back base 512. Is set. The second projecting portion 511b includes a standing portion 511b1 standing in front of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512, an engaging portion 511b2 projecting from both left and right ends of the standing portion 511b1, and a bottom surface portion. It is mainly provided with a recessed portion 511b3 which is recessed.

  In addition, a base member 511f including an LED that emits light to the lower side of the standing portion 511b1 is disposed on the second projecting portion 511b. The LEDs of the base member 511f are arranged in such a manner that light is emitted upward. Therefore, the periphery of the second winning opening 140 can be emitted by the LED.

  The standing portions 511b1 are formed so as to stand upward from the upper end of the second projecting portion 511b, and are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction, and the standing tips are connected to each other. The standing portion 511b1 is formed such that the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is inclined downward toward the second winning port 140 (the back side), and the vertical position of the end portion on the second winning port 140 side is the second winning port 140. It is set to a height that matches the bottom surface. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be rolled to the second winning port 140 side. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can enter the second winning opening 140.

  Moreover, the connection part of the standing part 511b1 provided in parallel is formed in the shape where the center position of the circumferential direction was dented below. Thereby, the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be easily retained at the center in the left-right direction of the standing portion 511b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning port 140 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with the game ball sent later and being pushed out to the outside, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140. it can.

  The engaging portion 511b2 is a portion that engages with left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and is formed to project from the left and right sides of the base end portion of the standing portion 511b1 toward the center of a shaft supporting portion 511d described later.

  The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a driver when the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are fastened. Thereby, the screw can be inserted through the through hole 511b4 formed through the side surface on the back side of the recessed portion 511b3.

  The third projecting portion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball to the first out port 71 formed in the back surface base 512, and is formed at two locations with the second winning port 140 sandwiched between the back surface base 512 and the second winning port 140. It is formed adjacent to both outer sides of the 1-out port 71 in the left-right direction. In other words, the third protrusion 511c is formed at a position separated in the left-right direction by the size in the left-right direction of the second protrusion 511b and the first out port 71.

  The bottom surfaces of the third protrusions 511c are formed to be inclined downward toward the adjacent first out ports 71 (toward the left and right direction of the front base 511 (the left and right direction in FIG. 10A)). The lowest position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first out port 71. Therefore, the game ball sent to the upper part of the 3rd protrusion part 511c can be rolled toward the 1st out port 71, and can be made to enter the 1st out port 71.

  The shaft support portions 511d are formed so as to project in an annular shape from the back surface side of the front base 511, and two shaft support portions 511d are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (FIG. 10 (a) vertical direction) across the standing portion 511b1. . The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed larger than the diameter of a shaft member JB1 described later. Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted into the shaft support portion 511d.

  The back base 512 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body having a front view shape larger than that of the front base 511 in a front view. Therefore, the player can directly visually recognize the front surface of the back base 512 that does not overlap the front base 511 in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent material, the back base 512 can be visually recognized through the front base 511 in a portion where the front base 511 overlaps the front. Further, the player can visually recognize the game ball sent between the back base 512 and the front base 511 through the front base 511.

  The back base 512 is formed on both sides of the first winning port 64 formed at the upper end portion on the front side, the second winning port 140 formed below the first winning port 64, and the second winning port 140. The first out port 71 and the general winning port 63 formed in the upper part of the first out port 71 on the right side when viewed from the front are mainly provided.

  The first winning port 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the substantially central position of the front base 511 in the left-right direction (FIG. 10 (a) left-right direction), and protrudes in both the front-rear direction along the recessed edge. It is formed. Further, the protruding front end on the front side (the front side of FIG. 10A) is closed by a plate member.

  The concave shape of the first winning opening 64 is formed in such a size that a game ball can be inserted inside, and the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined to the back side. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13.

  The second winning port 140 is formed to penetrate the lower side of the first winning port 64 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 10A). The second winning opening 140 is formed in a square shape having a size larger than the diameter of the game ball in front view. Therefore, the game ball can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning opening 140. Moreover, the 2nd prize winning opening 140 is provided with the recessed part 140a recessedly provided by the inner side surface of right and left.

  The concave portion 140a is curved and formed around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. Thereby, projections 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, can be accommodated inside thereof. That is, the inside of the second winning opening 140 is set such that the game ball can pass and the protrusions 523L and 523R are inserted.

  The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front to the rear on both the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the back base 512. The shaft hole 512a is a groove for inserting a shaft member JB1, which will be described later, into a circular shape having a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

  The first out port 71 is formed through the left and right sides of the second winning port 140. The first out port 71 is a hole for collecting a game ball that has flowed down the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 13, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front and has a width in the vertical direction (short direction). The dimension is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. The first out port 71 is formed such that the bottom surface (the inner surface on the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined to the back side. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the first out port 71 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13.

  The first out port 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that is connected to the bottom surface and protrudes to the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member for receiving the game ball that has flowed down the game area on its upper surface and sending it to the first out port 71, and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the back side.

  A plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in parallel on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. Thereby, the rigidity of the guide wall 512b can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide wall 512b from being damaged when the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

  The fastening between the front base 511 and the back base 512 is performed by the above-described through hole 511b4 and the fastening hole 512c formed through the back base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the rear base 512 combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver is inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw is fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. Can be done.

  The first electric accessory 520 is formed as a single unit with a left wing member 520L disposed on the left side of the second winning opening 140 and a right wing member 520R disposed on the right side of the front view.

  Note that the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R differ only in the positions of bulging portions 524L and 524R, which will be described later, and the other members are formed symmetrically with respect to the second winning port 140, so Except for the protruding portions 524L and 524R, only the left wing member 520L will be described, and a detailed description of the right wing member 520R will be omitted.

  Further, the left wing member 520L and the right wing member 520R are in a first state (closed state) in which a corner portion on the far side from the through hole 521L is positioned above the gravity direction by driving a solenoid 531 of a drive unit 530 described later. Displacement is possible in the second state (open state) in which the corner on the far side from the through-hole 521L is displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second prize opening 140, and unless otherwise specified, the first state Shall be explained. Further, the opposite side surfaces of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R in the first state will be described with reference numerals of the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

  The left wing member 520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at a lower end portion in the gravity direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a rear surface from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. A protrusion 523L protruding to the side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the through hole 521L side, a bulging portion 524L protruding from the side surface 526L, and the inside of the through hole 521L And a shaft member JB1 inserted into the main body. A detailed description of the bulging portion 524L will be described later.

  The shaft member JB1 is a columnar bar member formed from a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is a shaft that rotatably holds the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

  Further, the shaft member JB1 has an axial length that is substantially the same as or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed front end surface of the shaft hole 512a to the back side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the back base 512, one end (end on the back base 512 side) of the shaft member JB1 is inserted into the inside of the shaft hole 512a and the other side (end on the front base 511 side). ) Is inserted inside the shaft support portion 511d, the shaft member JB1 can be held between the front base 511 and the back base 512.

  The left wing member 520L is set to have a dimension in the front-rear direction smaller than a distance dimension between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other. Therefore, when the front base 511 and the back base 512 are assembled, the blade member 520L can be rotatably held between the front base 511 and the back base 512 by inserting the shaft member JB1 through the through hole 521L. .

  The recess 522L is formed to be recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the recessed dimension is set smaller than the protruding distance of the shaft support 511d. Further, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L of the recess 522L to the inner peripheral surface is set to be larger than the radial dimension of the shaft support portion 511d from the axis to the outer peripheral surface.

  Therefore, when the wing member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the back surface base 512, the front surface of the wing member 520L and the back surface of the front base 511 can be prevented from being grounded, and the wing member 520L and the front surface can be prevented. The ground contact portion with the base 511 can be a recess 522L and a shaft support 511d. Accordingly, it is possible to partially ground the wing member 520L and the front base 511. As a result, when the wing member 520L is rotated by driving a solenoid 531 which will be described later, the resistance acting on the wing member 520L can be reduced and the wing member 520L can be easily rotated.

  Further, since the shaft support portion 511d can be accommodated inside the recess 522L, the distance dimension between the front base 511 and the back base 512 facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the winning opening unit 500 can be reduced.

  Here, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L of the wing member 520L.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L, when the wing member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing the parts. is there. For this reason, there has been a problem that the cost of parts becomes high.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is only inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the wing member 520L, and the wing member 520L and the shaft member JB1 are separated into the winning a prize opening unit 500. It can be arranged. Therefore, only the wing member 520L can be replaced when the wing member 520L is damaged. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in component costs.

  Further, as described above, the fastening of the front base 511 to the back base 512 can be performed from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, when the wing member 520L is damaged, the front base 511 can be removed from the back base 512 with the winning slot unit 500 attached to the game board 13. As a result, component replacement of the wing member 520L can be easily performed.

  That is, when the front base 511 is removed from the back side of the back base 512, it is necessary to remove the front base 511 from the back base 512 after removing the winning hole unit 500 from the game board 13, and this front base 511 is Since it is formed so as to be removable from the side, the front base 511 can be easily removed. As a result, component replacement of the wing member 520L can be easily performed.

  Here, if the front base 511 is removable from the front side of the back base 512, the heads of screws and the like that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be visually recognized from the player side (front side), and the player can By visually recognizing the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the player's interest may be impaired.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are fastened using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, the screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4 by inserting the driver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511. Therefore, even when the front base 511 is positioned on the front side of the through-hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be fastened by inserting the driver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads such as screws for fastening the front base 511 and the back base 512 can be hardly seen from the player side (front side). As a result, the player can visually recognize the heads of the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the back base 512, thereby suppressing the player's interest from being impaired.

  Usually, the decorative symbol display device 800 and the segment display device 600 that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13 are set at the height of the player's eyes. Accordingly, the winning opening unit 500 is disposed below the player's eye level. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512 from the player side, and the player visually recognizes the head of the screw that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be prevented from being damaged.

  Since the front base 511 is formed of a transparent resin material, the head of the screw can be visually recognized through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front base 511 has irregularities on the front side. Since the pattern is formed, light can be emitted in the other direction due to the difference in thickness of the plate. Thereby, the head of the screw visible through the front base 511 can be blurred. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. FIGS. 15A and 15B are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. FIGS. 16A and 16B are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

  15 (a) and 16 (a) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is located in the first state, and FIGS. 15 (b) and 16 (b) illustrate the first electric motor. A state in which the accessory 520 is located in the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, the rotating member 533, and the sliding The first case member 534 is disposed mainly so as to displace the member 532 in a displaceable state, and the second case member 536 is attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

  The solenoid 531 includes an electric wire inside, a main body portion 531a that generates an electromagnetic force when electric power flows through the electric wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body portion, and the movable body. And an engagement portion 531c attached to the distal end portion of the main body.

  The main body 531a is formed in a prismatic shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and an electric wire is disposed inside. On the front side of the main body 531a, a recess is formed on the back side, and a movable body 531b formed in a columnar shape is disposed inside the recess.

  The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can be slid to the back side (inside the main body portion 531a) by applying electric power to the electric wire of the main body portion 531a to generate electromagnetic force.

  The engaging part 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite to the main body part 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in a disk shape having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and the axis thereof is disposed so as to be substantially collinear with the axis of the movable body 531b.

  The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of a sliding member 532 described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be displaced in the front-back direction (FIG. 15A left-right direction) with the displacement of the movable body 531b.

  The sliding member 532 is formed in an approximately E shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first protrusions protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side. The projection 532b is mainly provided with a second projection 532c that is located in the middle of the two first projections 532b and that projects from the front side.

  The sliding member 532 is formed such that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534 described later. Thereby, the sliding member 532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

  The connecting portion 532a is formed on the left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c, the concave portion 532a1 provided on the back side, the engaging groove 532a2 connected to the front side of the concave portion 532a1 and provided on the upper surface side. The cut portion 532a3 is mainly provided and formed.

  As described above, the recess 532a1 is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from coming into contact with the connecting portion 532a when the engagement portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engagement groove 532a2. That is, the concave portion 532a1 is formed in an arc shape whose concave surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. Thereby, it can suppress that the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 contact | abuts to the connection part 532a.

  The engagement groove 532a2 is formed to be connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess in the direction of gravity from the upper surface side is set larger than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The engaging groove 532a2 is set such that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the diameter of the engaging portion 531c, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engaging portion 531c. The portion 531c is formed larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the engaging portion 531c can be inserted inside the engaging groove 532a2.

  The notch 532a3 is a cut for facilitating elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting a first protrusion 532b, which will be described later, to the rotating member 533, and as described above, the left and right ends of the base end of the second protrusion 532c. In addition to being formed on both sides, a cut is formed toward the back side.

  The first protrusion 532b includes an engagement hole 532d formed to penetrate in the left-right direction. The engagement hole 532d is formed in a long hole shape that is long in the front-rear direction, and has a first opening 532d1 that is recessed from the front end to the lower side in the gravitational direction and a rear end to the lower side in the gravitational direction. The second opening 532d2 that is recessed is mainly provided and formed. The detailed description of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be described later.

  The engagement hole 532d is set such that the vertical width dimension at the center in the front-rear direction (portion other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is larger than the vertical dimension of the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 described later. Is done. Thereby, the protrusion 533b can be arranged inside the engagement hole 532d.

  As described above, the second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b and is formed so as to protrude from the front side. Moreover, the 2nd protrusion 532c is provided with the standing wall 532c1 standing upright on the front end side on the opposite side to the connection part 532a. A detailed description of the standing wall 532c1 will be described later.

  The rotary member 533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. The The clearance between the two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 533 (between the two plate-like bodies).

  In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 533 (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set to be smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. The Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 facing each other.

  The rotating member 533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes in the left and right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes in the left-and-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a side view that is substantially omitted. It is mainly provided with a drive portion 533d formed to be recessed at the tip of the other end side of the L-shape.

  The rotating shaft 533c is formed to project from the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the projecting tip surfaces is set to be approximately the same as the width of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Further, the projecting dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set larger than the thickness dimension of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction. Therefore, while receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside the recessed part 534a of the 1st case member 534 mentioned later, the 2nd case member 535 is assembled | attached to the 1st case member 534, and the rotating member 533 is attached to the 1st case member 534 and the 1st case member 534. The two case members 535 can be held in a rotatable state.

  The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude on both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is a distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. It is set to be approximately the same as the dimensions. The protrusion dimension of the protrusion 533b is set larger than the width dimension of the first protrusion 532b in the left-right direction. Therefore, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by inserting the protrusion 533b into the engagement hole 532d of the first protrusion 532b.

  The sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 are connected by elastically deforming the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 to the left and right to widen the facing distance between the two first protrusions 532b. it can. In this case, as described above, the slit 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, so that the space between the two first protrusions 532b can be easily widened. As a result, the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

  Further, the distance dimension between the opposing inner surfaces of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the distance dimension between the opposing outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b, or the opposing outer surfaces of the first protrusions 532b. It is set slightly larger than the distance dimension between them. Thereby, in the state which has arrange | positioned the rotation member 533 and the sliding member 532 inside the 1st case member 534, it can suppress that the 1st protrusion 532b elastically deforms to the left-right direction outer side. As a result, the connection between the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be prevented from being disconnected.

  The drive unit 533d is formed to be recessed from the front side toward the back side. The drive unit 533d can accommodate the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing member 520L on the inner side. In other words, the driving unit 533d is set to a size that is larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L and 523R. By housing the protrusions 523L and 523R in the drive unit 533d, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state in accordance with the displacement of the drive unit 533d. A detailed description of the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be given later.

  The first case member 534 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view with an opening inside, and is extended in the front-rear direction. The first case member 534 is notched on the lower side of the back surface side, and the second case member 535 can be disposed in the notched portion.

  The first case member 534 is mainly provided with a recess 534a that is recessed in the front side in a notch portion on the back side, and a standing portion 534b that is erected on the bottom surface on the inner peripheral side.

  As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotation shaft 533c of the rotation member 533 on the inner side, and is recessed in a shape larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft 533c. Therefore, the rotating member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534 by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 in a state where the rotating shaft 533c is housed inside.

  The standing portion 534b is formed such that the lower inner peripheral surface of the second winning port 140 of the back base 512 and the standing tip surface thereof are set at the same height, are extended to the back side, and are inclined downward. Is done. Thereby, in a state where the drive unit 530 is disposed on the back surface of the back surface base 512, the game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 can roll on the upper surface of the standing portion 534b and be sent to the second case member 535. .

  The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined thickness on the back side. The second case member 535 includes a through hole 535a that is formed to penetrate in the vertical direction.

  The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball. As described above, the game ball sent to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper portion of the standing portion 534b is passed through the through hole 535a. The ball can be sent downward. As a result, the game balls that have flowed down the game area and entered the second winning opening 140 can be collected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the displacement of the first electric accessory 520 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 15A and FIG. 16A, in a state where the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b. At the same time, the urging force of an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a is projected to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A).

  In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is positioned on the back side (second opening 532d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d. In addition, the rotation member 533 is positioned between the drive unit 533d and the rotation shaft 533c at the position of the center of gravity in a side view. That is, a rotational force is always applied to the rotating member 533 in the direction in which the driving unit 533d is pushed down around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c.

  Therefore, even when the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is positioned on the back surface side (second opening 533d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d, the projection 533b is located on the inner side of the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (FIG. 15A ) You can stop at the upper part without being guided by the lower side)).

  Further, since the drive unit 533d is pushed down, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R housed inside the drive unit 533d are pushed down. Thus, the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are in a state where the corners farther from the through holes 521L and 521R are positioned above the through holes 521L and 521R (first state (see FIG. 16A)). The

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 16B, when electric power is applied to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531, the movable body 531b is drawn into the main body 531a by the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a. It is.

  Therefore, with the displacement of the movable body 531b, the sliding member 532 connected to the distal end side of the movable body 531b is slid to the rear side (right side in FIG. 15B). As described above, the rotating member 533 is always in a state in which the rotational force in the direction of pushing down the driving unit 533d is applied around the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, the engaging hole 532d of the sliding member 532 is engaged. The projection 533b housed inside the second opening 533d2 is slid within the second opening 533d2 without being caught by the proximal end portion.

  The protrusion 533b that slides inside the second opening 533d2 is in contact with the front end (first opening 532d1 side) end of the engagement hole 532d at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, and the rear side (FIG. 15). (B) It is displaced to the right side. In this case, since the protrusion 533b is rotationally displaced about the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. That is, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

  Further, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the driving unit 533d can be displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 15B). As a result, the wing member 520L is rotated around the axes of the through holes 521L and 521R, and the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L and 521R are displaced left and right (second state (FIG. 16 (b) )))).

  On the other hand, the displacement from the second state to the first state is performed by cutting off the power supply to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531. As a result, the electromagnetic force generated in the main body portion 531a disappears, so that an urging spring (not shown) provided around the movable body 531b and interposed between the main body portion 531a and the connecting portion 532a. Due to the urging force, the movable body 531b protrudes to the front side (left side in FIG. 15A). As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced to the first state position.

  As described above, since the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, the depth of the recess in the lower side of the first opening 532d1 in the gravitational direction (lower side in FIG. 15B) is small. It is formed deeper toward the back side (right side in FIG. 15B).

  As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 is caused to collide with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, thereby causing the protrusion 533b to move in the direction of gravity. It can be easily displaced.

  Next, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a) and 17 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10 (a). In FIG. 17A, the first electric combination 520 is positioned in the first state, and in FIG. 17B, the state where the first electric combination 520 is positioned in the second state is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIG. 17A, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are the first protrusions 511a. Located in the vicinity. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from flowing down between the left and right wing members 520L and 520R when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

  Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b projects from the inside of the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is in a state of being located on the front side (left side in FIG. 17A). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is disposed in the vicinity of the second winning opening 140.

  In this case, the distance dimension from the standing tip (end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17A)) of the standing wall 532c1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534. L1 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  As a result, even when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes forward, the game ball can flow between the left and right wing members 520L and 520R. In this case, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. In other words, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is damaged, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the store side is disadvantageous even if the player continues to play the game.

  In the present embodiment, a sensor device SE1 that detects that a game ball has entered the second winning port 140 is disposed in the flow path of the game ball of the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the game ball has passed through the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to roll the game ball to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the game ball inside the first case member 534, the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from detecting that the game ball has entered the second winning port 140.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L and 521R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are more than in the first state. Is also separated from the first projecting portion 511a, and the separated distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the game area can be received by the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R and can be rolled to the second winning port 140. That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

  Further, as described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is drawn inside the main body portion 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engaging portion 531c) is in a state of being located on the back side (right side in FIG. 17B). That is, the standing wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is disposed at a position farther from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

  In this case, the distance dimension from the standing tip (end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 17B)) of the standing wall 532c1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534. L2 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball.

  Accordingly, when the first electric accessory 520 is set to the second state, the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are displaced so that the game balls flowing down the game area can easily enter the second winning opening 140. In addition, the game ball that has entered the second winning port 140 can be rolled to the second case member 535 by rolling the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534.

  Furthermore, since the standing wall 532c1 can be slid and displaced in a direction substantially coincident with the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, the wing member 520L, When the 520R is broken (or is fraudulent) and released, the game ball stopped by colliding with the standing wall 532c1 is pushed out to the opposite side of the rolling direction by the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. Can be suppressed. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened by driving the solenoid 531 and the game ball can enter the second winning port 140, the gaming ball is prevented from being blocked by the second winning port 140. it can. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the inside of the second winning opening when the first electric accessory 520 is opened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to a player's fraud. FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B are front views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 19A and FIG. 19B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530.

  In FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, the front base 511 is transparently illustrated for easy understanding. 19A shows the first electric combination 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and FIG. 19B shows the case where only the first electric combination 520 is displaced from the first state. This state is shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the first electric combination 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state only by the first electric combination 520 due to a player's fraud (goat action). The protrusions 523L and 523R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are displaced inside the second opening 532d2 of the engagement hole 532d. That is, since the space in which the protrusions 523L and 523R can be displaced is formed, it is possible to prevent the first electric combination 520 from being damaged when the first electric combination 520 is forcibly displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20A and FIG. 11B, the displacement of the standing portion 523c1 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced due to a player's fraudulent act will be described. 20A is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 along the line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18A, and FIG. 20B is a winning opening unit 500 along the line XXb-XXb in FIG. 18B. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's urging action, the solenoid of the drive unit 530 The positions of 531 and the sliding member 532 are not displaced, and only the first electric accessory 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

  As described above, when the first electric accessory 520 is positioned in the first state, the first electric accessory 520 is placed from the standing tip of the standing wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 20A)) to the second. The distance dimension L1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the one case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  Here, conventionally, a second winning port 140 formed so that a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members 520L and 520R disposed between the second winning port 140, and the pair of wing members A driving means (solenoid 531) that applies a driving force to 520L and 520R to open or close, and a pair of wing members 520L and 520R that are opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) causes the second prize opening 140 to be opened. When the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), the game balls enter the second winning opening 140. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means that is arranged at a regulating position that regulates a ball.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, after the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside, the restricting means is displaced from the restricted position to the allowed position. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of restricting illegally entering a game ball into the second winning opening 140 is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the standing walls 532c1 is maintained in the restricted position in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside. Since it is formed to be possible, it is possible to suppress the standing wall 532c1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict illegally entering the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

  That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to set the standing tip (gravity) of the standing wall 532c1. The distance dimension L3 from the lower side in the direction (the lower end in FIG. 20B) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to send a game ball to the second winning opening 140 by a player's fraudulent act, the gaming ball is inserted into the second winning opening 140 and rolls. This can be suppressed. Accordingly, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state (the game ball can be sent to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the gaming ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate entering the ball.

  In this case, the standing wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously with the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. There is no need for a separate member that restricts illegal entry into the winning opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a case where the second protrusion 532c is further pushed to the back side when the first electric actor 520 is brought into the second state due to the player's illegal act will be described. . FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 22A is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIa in FIG. 21A, and FIG. 22B is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in the range XXIIb in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a protrusion 532d3 is formed on the inner side of the second opening 532d2 so as to protrude from the inner surface on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A). Further, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is formed with a notch 533b1 formed by cutting the outer peripheral surface in a side view.

  The protrusion 532d3 and the notch 533b1 are formed in shapes corresponding to the outer diameters. That is, the protrusion shape of the protrusion 532d3 and the cut shape of the notch 533b1 in a side view are substantially the same.

  Therefore, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed to the back side from the state in which only the first electric accessory 520 shown in FIG. 21A and FIG. Then, the protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement is restricted to the back side of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532). As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball is entered into the second winning port 140 and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is placed. It is possible to suppress the ball being sent by rolling.

  In the present embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the back side (see FIG. 22A). Thereby, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1.

  That is, since the side surface of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined toward the back side upward, the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is further moved to the back side with the protrusion 532d3 inserted into the notch 532b1. The direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the notch 532b1 when the force pushing into the protrusion 532d3 can be the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Accordingly, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be prevented from coming out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state due to the player's fraudulent act, the game ball enters the second winning port 140 and the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is moved. It is possible to reliably suppress rolling and pitching.

  In other words, a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is provided, and the transmission mechanism is opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) (see FIG. b) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 17A), and a slide member 532 that is slid and displaced, and a slide displacement of the slide member 532 to an open slide position causes the opening to rotate. A rotating member 533 that is rotated to the position to open the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, and is rotated to the closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed sliding position to close the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. The standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is When the wall 532c1 is disposed at the allowable position and the sliding member 532 is slid to the closed slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is disposed at the restricting position, and the sliding member 532 is disposed at the closed slide position. When the rotation member 533 is disposed at the open rotation position, the slide member 532 is engaged with the slide member 532 so that the slide displacement of the slide member 532 to the open slide position is restricted. It is possible to easily restrict the ball from entering the second winning opening 140 illegally.

  That is, when the pair of closed wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 rotates to the open rotation position with the sliding member 532 disposed at the closed slide position. Is done. In such a state, the sliding member 532 is engaged with the sliding member 532, so that the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is regulated, so that the regulating means can be maintained at the regulated position (regulating means). Can be prevented from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the game ball enters the second winning opening 140. The ball can be restricted by the restriction means.

  Further, an engagement hole 532d extends from one of the sliding member 532 and the rotation member 533, and a projection 533b projects from the other, and the projection 533b slides along the engagement hole 532d. The sliding displacement of the member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engaging hole 532d, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to release the regulation while reducing the size.

  That is, a means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position by using the engaging hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 and rotating the same. Since it can be formed and it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the protrusion 533b is engaged with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, it is difficult to make unauthorized access to the engagement portion from the outside, and the restriction (engagement) is released accordingly. It can be difficult.

  Next, the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and FIG. 23B is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. FIG. 24A is a front view of the prize opening unit 500, and FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit 500 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG.

  In FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b), the left-right direction when viewed in perspective is reversed between FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b). Further, in FIG. 24A, the front base 511 is shown in a transparent manner. Further, in FIG. 24B, the front base 511 transparently viewed in FIG. 24A is shown opaque. Further, in FIG. 24B, the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the bulging portion 524L formed on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521L side, and the front side (FIG. 24 (b) arrow F). Side) end surface. On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R formed on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is formed at the end portion on the through hole 521R side, and is formed continuously with the end surface on the back surface side (FIG. 24B, arrow B side). Is done.

  That is, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 24B).

  Further, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with a first region that is continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and has a size that does not contact the game ball guided through the first region. The bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R and the other wing on one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. The first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R. The

  Further, the bulging portion 524L has an end on the far side from the through-hole 521L inclined toward the through-hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 24 (b)) toward the rear side (upper side in FIG. 24 (b)). Formed. On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R is formed such that an end portion on the far side from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R from the back side to the front side.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26, a description will be given of a case where game balls are sent to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R. FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

  25 (a), 25 (b), 26 (a), and 26 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in FIG. 24 (b). In addition, in FIG. 25A and FIG. 25B, the transition state of the game ball when the game ball is sent from both sides of the first electric accessory 520 is illustrated in order. In FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the transition state of the game ball when the game ball is sent only to the left wing member 520L is illustrated in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B, when game balls are sent to both sides of the first electric accessory 520, the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R roll. The game balls to be rolled can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulging portions 524L, 524R.

  More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end face. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls to the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L.

  In this case, the bulging portion 524L has an end portion far from the through hole 521L toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 25 (b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25 (b)). Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulging portion 524L, it is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

  On the other hand, the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed to be connected to the end surface on the back side. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is rolled to the front side by rolling on the side surface 526R while being in contact with the bulging portion 524R.

  In this case, the bulging portion 524R has an end portion farther from the through hole 521R toward the through hole 521R from the back side (upper side in FIG. 25 (b)) toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 25 (b)). Since it is formed to be inclined, when the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulging portion 524R, it is possible to prevent the rolling of the game ball from being stopped due to an increase in resistance in the rolling direction.

  Therefore, the game ball rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought closer to the back side, while the game ball rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when game balls are sent from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress a frontal collision of the game balls sent from the left and right.

  Here, conventionally, there is a ball entrance (second winning port 140) in which a game ball can be entered and a guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) for guiding the game ball to the ball entrance and displacement. A gaming machine including a guide member (first electric accessory 520) formed in a possible manner is known. As the guide members, for example, a pair of wing members (feather members 520L and 520R) having a guide surface for guiding a game ball to the entrance and being disposed with the entrance end interposed therebetween and rotatably supported on the base end side. ) Is exemplified.

  A first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R), and the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of the other wing member. A technique for providing the second grooves on the entire surface of each is disclosed. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, the guide surface (side surfaces 526L, 526R) in one wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R). Even when the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R), the respective game balls are moved in different directions ( One can be biased to the glass plate side and the other to the game board side. Therefore, each of these game balls can smoothly enter the second winning opening 140.

  However, the above-described conventional technique has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, a game ball that has entered from one side of the guide member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface (side surfaces 526L and 526R) and the other side of the guide member (either the wing members 520L or 520R). On the other hand, there is a problem that the game ball is not entered into the entrance (second winning entrance 140), and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first electric accessory 520 has a pair of bulging portions formed so as to be able to come into contact with game balls that protrude from the side surfaces 526L and 526R and roll on the side surfaces 526L and 526R. 524L, 524R are provided, and the pair of bulging portions 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L, 526R in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, so the side surfaces 526L, 526R When the game ball guided (rolled) is brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

  In addition, the pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L and 526R in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, so that the pair of wing members 520L and 520R A game ball entering from one side can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, a game ball that has entered from one side of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (to the other of the wing members 520L and 520R). This can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

  Further, the first electric accessory 520 is formed as a pair of wing members 520L and 520R that are disposed with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween and rotatably supported on the base end side, and a pair of bulging portions 524L and 524R. Are protruded from the respective side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and the bulging portions 524L, 524R and the other wing member of one wing member 520L, 520R of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the 520L and 520R are arranged at different positions along the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are guided (rolled). The game ball to be moved is brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, so that the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140 and to prevent clogging of the balls.

  In addition, the bulging portions 524L and 524R in one wing member 520L and 520R and the bulging portions 524L and 524R in the other wing member 520L and 520R are guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R (feathers). The game balls that have entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one of the wing members 520L and 520R are arranged differently in a direction perpendicular to the direction from the front end side to the base end side of the members 520L and 520R. When the wing members 520L and 520R reach the side surfaces 5.26L and 526R, the game balls can be brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the other wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached into the side surfaces 526L and 526R in one wing member 520L and 520R passes through the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

  In other words, the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed with bulging portions 524L and 524R at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game balls rolled from the left and right are moved to different positions in the front-rear direction. Can be moved. Therefore, when a game ball is sent from both the left and right sides, it is possible to suppress a frontal collision of the game balls sent from the left and right. As a result, it is possible to suppress the time required for the game ball to enter the second winning port 140.

  That is, by making the position where the game ball collides different in the front-rear direction on the left and right, as shown in FIG. It becomes easy to bounce to 25 (b) upper side. On the other hand, the right game ball brought close to the front side tends to bounce back to the front side (lower side in FIG. 25B) due to the collision.

  Therefore, one game ball (rolling the left wing member 520L in this embodiment) can be easily entered into the second winning opening 140, and the other game ball is rebounded to the front side, thereby causing a collision. When this is done, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being too far away from the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the second game ball entering the second winning opening 140 later into the second winning opening 140. As a result, when game balls are sent to the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 520, the time taken for the game balls on both sides to enter the second winning opening 140 can be shortened, and the game progresses smoothly. Can proceed.

  Further, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the base end side (through hole 521 side) than the distal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, they are guided to the side surfaces 526L and 526R. It is possible to secure a rollable region until the game ball to be in contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R. Therefore, a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed correspondingly, and the second winning opening 140 can be smoothly entered.

  Further, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are protruded from the side surfaces 526L and 526R at positions closer to the base end side than the distal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, thereby being abutted and biased to the bulging portions 524L and 524R. It is possible to prevent the path of the game ball from returning to the path before the deviation before reaching the front of the entrance (the end of the guide surface). That is, the game ball can be easily sent from the side surfaces 526L and 526R to the entrance with the biased state.

  In addition, as described above, the side surfaces 526L and 526R are formed with the first region continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and are not in contact with the game ball guided through the first region. Since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed in such a size, when the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L and 526R rolls in the first region, the rolling speed of the game ball is reduced. This can be avoided, and the second winning opening 140 can be smoothly entered.

  In this case, the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R and which of the other wing members (the wing members 520L and 520R). Since the first regions of the side surfaces 526L and 526R on the other side are arranged at different positions in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls are guided along the side surfaces 526L and 526R, The game ball simultaneously guides the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in one of the members 520L and 520R) and the first region of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the other wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R). Even in the case of (rolling), these game balls can be biased in different directions, and the second winning opening 14 It can be ball entrance smoothly to.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), when a game ball is sent to one of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, the other left and right wing members 520L and 520R are used. The game ball is brought into contact with the bulging portion 524L or the bulging portion 524R of the ball, thereby preventing the game ball from rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the other left and right wing members 520L and 520R and dropping from the tip thereof. it can.

  More specifically, as described above, the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed to be connected to the front end face. Therefore, the game ball that rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls to the back side by rolling on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulging portion 524L. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L can be brought closer to the bulging portion 524R side formed on the right wing member 520R.

  In other words, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L and 520R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R is used as the second wing member. A game ball that rolls to the winning opening side can be rolled (closed) to a position that coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. .

  Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball is rolled to the back side (approaching) and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-rear direction. Position. On the other hand, when the game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball is rolled (approached) to the front side and substantially coincides with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-rear direction. Position.

  Thereby, when the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on one of the side surface 526L and the side surface 526R is high, the game ball rides on the side surface 526L, 526R of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R. Can be suppressed.

  Here, in the conventional prize opening unit 500, since the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the first electric combination 520 are formed on a smooth surface, the game ball sent from one of the first electric combination 520 is the other. There is a problem that the wing members 520L and 520R ride on the wing members 520L and 520R and are sent to the flow area from the tip of the other wing members 520L and 520R.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction in the first electric accessory 520, the game ball rolled from one wing member is used. It can be rolled to a position that substantially coincides with the bulging portions 524L and 524R formed on the other wing member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game ball rolling the one wing member 520L, 520R is caused to collide with the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the other wing member 520L, 520R, so that the game ball is a side surface 526L of the other wing member 520L, 520R, It is possible to prevent the player from riding on 526R and being sent to the game area from the tip of the wing members 520L and 520R.

  Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engaging portion 511b2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27A is a top view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 27B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 28 (a) and 28 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500 in the range XXVIII in FIG. 27 (b). In FIG. 28A, the first electric combination 520 is in the first state, and in FIG. 28B, the first electric combination 520 is in the second state.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the engaging portions 511b2 formed on the second projecting portion 511b of the front base 511 are disposed inside the recessed portions 525L and 525R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively. .

  In the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are in contact (see FIG. 28A). In the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side of the recessed portions 525L, 525R are in contact with the opposite ends.

  That is, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 is brought into contact with the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R. Therefore, the amount of displacement can be regulated.

  Further, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axes of the through holes 521L and 521R is caused by its own weight so that the corners far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the wing members 520L and 520R are directed to the second prize opening 140 side. The direction of rotation. Therefore, the wing members 520L and 520R rotate by their own weight when the engaging portion 511b2 and the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) abut. And the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the first state.

  Further, in the first state, the end portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R on the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) side are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2, so that the bulging portions of the wing members 520L and 520R The side surfaces of 524L and 524R can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2. Therefore, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed, the rigidity of the contact portion can be increased, so that the wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being damaged due to contact with the engagement portion 511b2.

  That is, in this embodiment, the base member 510 that rotatably supports the wing members 520L and 520R is provided, and the base member 510 abuts on the wing members 520L and 520R to rotate the wing members 520L and 520R. Since the engaging portion 511b2 to be regulated is provided and the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. That is, since the bulging portions 524L and 524R are portions protruding from the wing members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R), the portion of the base member 510 where the relatively high rigidity of the wing members 520L and 520R is provided. Since it can utilize as a stopper contact | abutted to the engaging part 511b2, damage to the wing | blade member 520L, 520R can be suppressed by that much.

  Further, the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed substantially flush with the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R, and are substantially surface on the side surfaces on the base end side of the wing members 520L and 520R in the closed state. Since the side surfaces of the bulged portions 524L and 524R formed at least abut against the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the portion (the bulged portion 524L) that is far from the rotation shaft (the through holes 521L and 521R). , 524R side surface) can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed. Further, for example, the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510 is separated from the second winning port 140, as compared with the case where the protruding front end surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R are brought into contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. And a space serving as a flow path to the second winning port 140 can be secured. In addition to the side surfaces of the bulging portions 524L and 524R, the base end side surface of the wing members 520L and 520R may be in contact with the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing members 520L and 520R can be further suppressed.

  In a state in which the wing members 520L and 520R are closed, the bulging portions 524L and 524R are disposed below the standing portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511 (downward in FIG. 28A). In other words, the standing portion 511b1 is disposed between the bulging portions 524L and 524R.

  Here, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball so as not to sandwich the gaming ball. In this case, when the bulging portions 524L and 524R are protruded from the side surfaces 526L and 526R, the protruding height of the bulging portions 524L and 524R is set so as not to sandwich the game ball between the bulging portions 524L and 524R. The pair of wing members 520L and 520R need to be further separated from each other, and the space necessary for arranging the pair of wing members 520L and 520R increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the closed state, the raised portion 511b1 is provided between the bulged portions 524L and 524R, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has the bulged portion 524L when viewed in the rotation axis direction. , 524R in the region where 524R is not formed, the facing distance between the side surfaces 526L, 526R is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L, 524R is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, Space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

  That is, even when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R start to close (begin the transition to the closed state) in a state where the game balls are guided (rolled) on the side surfaces 526L and 526R, By positioning the standing portion 511b1 between the facing 524R, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged between the facing portions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R and being sandwiched between the bulging portions 524L and 524R. . The game ball discharged from between the facing portions of the bulging portions 524L and 524R by the standing portion 511b1 is located between the facing surfaces 526L and 526R in the region where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are not formed. Since the facing interval at this position is larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is not sandwiched (see FIG. 27A). As a result, the facing distance between the bulging portions 524L and 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, a space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing member 520L, 520R can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be disposed in a space equivalent to a space necessary for disposing a conventional product in which the bulging portions 524L and 524R do not project from the side surfaces 526L and 526R.

  On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 521L521R causes the corner portion far from the through holes 521L and 521R of the wing members 520L and 520R to rotate downward in the gravitational direction due to its own weight. Is done. Therefore, the wing members 520L and 520R are self-weighted when the engaging portion 511b2 and the bulging portions 524L and 524R (side surfaces 526L and 526R) side of the recessed portions 525L and 525R come into contact with each other. While being able to suppress rotation, the wing members 520L and 520R can be held in the second state.

  Therefore, since the displacement of the wing members 520L and 520R can be regulated at locations other than the drive unit 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R described above, it is possible to suppress the damage to the drive unit 533d and the protrusions 523L and 523R. Therefore, the rotating member 533 can be reduced in size because it is not necessary to form a large part in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533. As a result, the drive unit 530 can be reduced in size.

  In the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located below the lower ends of the side surfaces 526L and 526R in the gravitational direction and is located above the lower end of the second winning opening 140 in the gravitational direction. The game ball guided by 526R can be sent to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and can be made to enter the second winning opening 140 by rolling the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 (FIG. 28B). )reference).

  Furthermore, as described above, the base member 511f including LEDs that irradiate light on the wing members 520L and 520R side (second winning opening 140 side) is disposed on the second protrusion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28A, in the first state, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned on the lower side in the gravity direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED of the base member 511f can be easily incident on the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R.

  That is, by irradiating LED light to the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R, it is possible to suppress the LED light from being reflected on the outer surfaces of the wing members 520L and 520R. As a result, light can be easily incident on the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the inside of the wing members 520L and 520R to the player side can be increased. As a result, the wing members 520L and 520R can be easily seen by the player even in the state through the front base 511 formed from the transparent material amount.

  Further, when the wing members 520L and 520R are set to the second state shown in FIG. 28B, the recessed portions 525L and 525R are set at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R. . Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the game ball sent to the front side of the second winning opening 140 by the LED of the base member 511f.

  In other words, the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L and 525R are positioned at substantially the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L and 521R, so that the gap between the facing portions of the first electric accessory 520 can be increased. . Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the game ball sent to the front side of the second prize opening by the LED of the base member 511f. As a result, even in a state through the front base 511 formed of a transparent material, it is possible for the player to easily see the game ball that is entered into the second winning opening 140.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the manner in which the winning opening unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the range XXIX of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 29, the winning opening unit 500 is disposed with a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

  Inside the lower end portion of the inner rail 76, a first out port 71 for collecting game balls flowing down the conventional game area is formed. Therefore, the lower end portion of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76a that is curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 in order to make it easier to gather game balls.

  Therefore, a gap is widened between the winning opening unit 500 and the inner rail 76 at the lower end portion (the portion where the curved portion 76a is formed) of the inner reel. As described above, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the winning opening unit 500 are fastened by inserting a driver or the like obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

  The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protruding portion 511b formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the front base 511. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be positioned above the bending portion 76a (upper side in FIG. 29). Accordingly, when a driver or the like is inserted obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511, the gap with the winning opening unit 500 formed by the curved portion 76a can be used, so the front base from the front side of the game board 13 can be used. 511 can be easily detached from the back surface base 512.

  Further, since the inside of the recessed portion 511b3 can be made difficult to be seen by the player by the inner rail 76, the player's interest is reduced by visually recognizing a screw or the like that fastens the front base 511 and the back base 512. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36.

  First, the configuration of the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. 30A is a front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative symbol display device 800, and FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative symbol display device 800. FIG. 33A is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is developed, and FIG. 33B is a front view in which the outer reel 821 is developed.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 to 33, the decorative symbol display device 800 includes an inner reel unit 810 that is configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 that houses a part of the inner reel unit 810, and an inner reel unit 810. A housing unit 880 that houses the outer reel unit 820 inside, a drive motor KM1 that is attached to the housing unit 880 and rotationally drives the inner reel unit 810, and a housing unit 880 that attaches the outer reel unit 820. The driving motor KM2 that is driven to rotate and a backlight unit 830 that is disposed inside the inner reel unit 810 are mainly provided.

  The inner reel unit 810 includes a substantially cylindrical inner reel 811 penetrating left and right, a rotating member 812 disposed on one end side (left side in FIG. 30A) of the inner reel 811, and the inner reel 811 And an annular member 813 disposed on the other end side of the opening (right side in FIG. 30A).

  The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a belt-like sheet formed of a transparent resin along the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the inner reel 811 has decorative patterns arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction being the vertical direction. Each of the inner reels 811 of the three decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged in parallel has a different arrangement of the decorative symbols.

  The rotating member 812 connects a hub 812a formed in a substantially disc shape, a rim 812b formed in a substantially annular shape having a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and an outer peripheral surface of the hub 812a and an inner peripheral surface of the rim 812b. And spokes 812c.

  The hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed in the same straight line as the respective axes, and are arranged at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spoke 812c is formed to be inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

  The rim 812b is a part where one end side of the inner reel 811 is affixed to the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b, and is formed to have an outer diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the distance dimension in the circumferential direction at the outer peripheral portion of the rim 812b is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the longitudinal direction of the developed inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) on the outer peripheral surface of the rim 812b without any gap.

  The hub 812a is disposed inside the inner reel 811. That is, the spoke 812c that connects the hub 812a and the rim 812b is formed to be inclined toward the other end (annular member 813 described later) side of the opening of the inner reel 811 as it goes radially inward. Thereby, the hub 812a can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. The spoke 812c is formed of a plurality of rod-like bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and includes an inner opening 812c1 that opens between the spokes 812c adjacent in the circumferential direction.

  The hub 812a has a position in the axial direction substantially the same as the center position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811. As a result, a space closer to the annular member 813 than the hub 812a can be secured. The hub 812a is connected to a driving motor KM1 that applies a rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810.

  In the drive motor KM1, the thickness dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 is approximately half of the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the hub 812a has a position in the axial direction that is substantially the same as the central position in the left-right direction of the inner reel 811, and is located on the inner side of the opening of the inner reel 811 on the other end (ring member 813) side. Since a space is formed, most of the drive motor KM1 can be disposed inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

  Further, the drive motor KM1 has a rotation shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, since the shaft of the hub 812a and the shaft of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, the inner reel 811 can be rotated about the shaft of the inner reel 811 by the rotation of the drive motor KM1. Thereby, the symbol decorated on the inner reel 811 can be visually recognized as a mode in which the player is displaced in the vertical direction.

  The annular member 813 is formed in an annular shape having an outer diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. In the annular member 813, the inner peripheral surface on the other end side (the right side in FIG. 30A) of the opening of the inner reel 811 is attached to the outer peripheral surface.

  Here, since the inner reel 811 is formed of a transparent resin sheet as described above, it has a relatively low rigidity. For this reason, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the inner reel unit 810 may be deformed due to the centrifugal force or wind pressure of the rotation, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel unit 810.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inner reel 811 is connected to the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 on one end side and the ring member 813 is connected to the other end side, so that the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. At that time, it becomes difficult to displace due to the centrifugal force and wind pressure. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally displaced, the player can recognize the symbols decorated around the inner reel 811 accurately.

  Further, since the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load on the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a load applied to the drive motor KM1 when the inner reel unit 810 is rotationally driven. As a result, the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 can be smoothly started.

  The outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, a hub 823 formed in a disk shape having a smaller diameter than the outer reel 821, and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (FIG. ) Left side) and the spoke 822 that connects the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  The outer reel 821 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the inner reel 811 and a width dimension in the axial direction larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. The inner reel 811 is formed of a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. Note that the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the decoration mode will be described later.

  The hub 823 is arranged coaxially with the outer reel 821, and is arranged at a substantially central position in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. The hub 823 is connected to a drive motor KM2 that applies a rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820.

  The spokes 822 are formed so as to be inclined in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the outer side in the radial direction of the hub 823, whereby one end side of the openings of the spokes 822 and the outer reel 821 (left side in FIG. 30 (a)). A space can be formed between the two. The spoke 822 is formed of a plurality of rod-like bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge portion 824, and includes an opening 822a that opens between the spokes 822 adjacent in the circumferential direction.

  In the drive motor KM2, the thickness dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is approximately half of the dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 has a position in the axial direction that is substantially the same as the center in the left-right direction of the outer reel 821, and has a space on one end (FIG. 30A left in the left-right direction) side of the opening of the outer reel 821. Thus, most of the drive motor KM2 can be disposed inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

  The housing unit 880 is formed in a box-like body whose front side is open, and can accommodate the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 therein. The accommodation unit 880 mainly includes a pair of left and right side wall portions 881, and an upper wall portion 882, a lower wall portion 883, and a back wall portion 884 that are disposed at the edge between the pair of side wall portions 881. It is formed.

  The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 30A) and in the front-back direction (FIG. 30B). In the left-right direction) smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum.

  The side wall portion 881 is provided with a drive motor KM2 for driving the outer reel unit 820 on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side when viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 30A). ) A drive motor KM1 for driving the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the right side wall portion 881. That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced with respect to the side wall portion 881.

  Further, the side wall portion 881 includes a bulging portion 881a that bulges in a curved shape corresponding to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 on the side surface on the front side. Thereby, it can suppress that the light irradiated from the backlight unit 830 mentioned later escapes from the left-right outer side of the inner reel 811. FIG.

  The side wall portion 881 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the rigidity of the accommodation unit 880 can be increased. In addition, the heat generated inside the housing unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the housing unit 880 by being generally formed of a metal material having higher thermal conductivity than the resin material. As a result, the heat can be accumulated inside the housing unit 880, thereby preventing the parts from being broken.

  The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the housing unit 880, and the edge portion and the lower portion (FIG. 30 (b)) of the upper portion (FIG. 30 (b) upper portion) of the side wall portion 881. And the lower edge).

  The width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 30 (a) left-right direction) of the upper wall part 882 and the lower wall part is formed smaller than the width dimension of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction (axial direction). Thereby, the distance dimension between the opposing side wall portions 881 can be secured, and the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be arranged between the opposing sides.

  The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating in the radial direction with respect to the axis of the outer reel 821. Thereby, the fluidity | liquidity of the air of the inside of the storage unit 880 and the exterior can be improved. As a result, heat can be prevented from accumulating inside the housing unit 880, and parts can be prevented from being broken by the heat of the housing unit 880.

  The back wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms a side surface on the back surface side of the housing unit 880, and is disposed along an edge portion on the back surface side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the side wall portion 881.

  The back wall portion 884 is formed with an opening 884a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position intersecting the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 30B), and both left and right end portions where the opening 884a is formed. And an upright portion 884b which is bent up to the front side.

  The opening 884a is formed such that the width dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 30A) is larger than the width dimension in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the outer reel 821 from colliding with the back wall portion 884 when the outer reel 821 is moved in the front-rear direction (swayed) due to the inertial force or vibration of the rotation operation.

  That is, when the outer reel 821 is moved in the front-rear direction (swayed) due to the inertia force or vibration of the rotation operation, a part of the rear side (right side in FIG. 30B) of the outer reel 821 is opened 884a. Can be inserted inside. As a result, the outer reel 821 can be prevented from colliding with the back wall portion 884.

  In addition, the opening 884a can enhance the air fluidity between the inside and the outside of the housing unit 880. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from staying inside the storage unit 880, and it is possible to suppress parts from being broken by the heat of the storage unit 880.

  Here, if the opening 884a larger than the width of the outer reel 821 in the axial direction is formed in the back wall 884, the rigidity of the back wall 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a is lowered. Therefore, there is a possibility that the back wall portion 884 is bent.

  Further, in this case, it is conceivable to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884 on both the left and right sides of the opening 884a by increasing the space between the side walls 881. There was a problem that the unit itself of the apparatus 800 became large.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the standing portions 884b are formed on both the left and right sides of the back wall portion 884 where the openings 884a are formed. Thereby, the rigidity of back wall part 884 can be made high. As a result, it is possible to suppress the back wall portion 884 from bending.

  In the present embodiment, the back wall portion 884 is made of a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right end portions of the opening 884a to the left and right end portions of the back wall portion 884 is made sufficiently small. Therefore, the deformation rate of plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the back wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, the rigidity can be increased.

  The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from the inside of the inner reel 811 so that the player can easily recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811, and is disposed inside the front of the inner reel 811.

  The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape in a side view, and the axis of the arc is arranged coaxially with the axis of the inner reel 811. Further, the width dimension in the axial direction of the backlight unit 830 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811.

  Further, the length L4 in the circumferential direction of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to have a length corresponding to three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811 described later.

  Further, the backlight unit 830 is provided with three recesses 831 that are recessed radially inward on the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Therefore, a partition plate 832 is formed between the concave portions 831 so as to stand on the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830.

  A base member 833 including an LED that emits light is disposed on a radially inner side surface of each recess 831, and light can be emitted toward the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830 by the LED.

  Each base member 833 can be independently supplied with electric power, and the inner reel 811 can partially emit light. In this case, each base member 833 is arranged in a region (recess 831) surrounded by four sides, so that the light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 is incident on the front surface region of the other base member 833. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be easily made to emit light partially.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. FIG. 33A is a front view in which the inner reel 811 is developed, and FIG. 33B is a front view in which the outer reel 821 is developed.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, on the inner reel 811, a plurality of symbols are drawn at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33). Note that the dimension L5 in the circumferential direction of one symbol is set to one third of the circumferential length L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5 × 3 = L4) as described above.

  The inner reel 811 is formed of a material that can transmit light as a whole. In particular, the light transmittance of the symbol portion (for example, “7”) is higher than that of the surrounding margin portion. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LED of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811, the light from the LED can be transmitted through the inner reel 811 and the design portion can be lifted. Therefore, if the LED of the backlight unit 830 is set in a light emitting state, the inner reel 811 is not irradiated with outside light (light inside the store or light of other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10). The player can visually recognize the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, five types and ten symbols are drawn continuously in the circumferential direction, and a maximum of three symbols can be visually recognized from the player side by the segment display device 600 described later. As described above, each of the decorative symbol display devices 800 is decorated with a different arrangement of symbols, and the player can visually recognize up to nine symbols.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 displays 3 × 3 symbols on the inner reel 811, thereby setting a total of 5 effective hit lines, 3 in parallel in the horizontal direction and 2 in the diagonal direction. Is done. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three “7” symbols are aligned on any of the active lines, the player can be informed of the occurrence of the big hit state.

  As shown in FIG. 33B, the outer reel 821 includes a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated and a non-transmissive surface 821b that is decorated so as not to transmit light.

  The non-decorative surface 821a can transmit light because it is not decorated. That is, by forming the outer reel 821 from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material), a non-decorative surface 821a that can transmit light is formed. The non-decorative surface 821a only needs to be formed so as to be able to transmit light, and for example, may be provided with a translucent decoration capable of transmitting light.

  The decorative symbol display device 800 rotates the outer reel unit 820 so that the non-decorative surface 821a faces the player side, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the symbol of the inner reel 811 disposed inside the outer reel 821. it can. That is, the player can visually recognize the design of the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821.

  The non-transmissive surface 821b is made non-transmissive by providing a black decoration on the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side in FIG. 33B). Further, the non-transmissive surface 821b is formed to have a length in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33B) equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811.

  As described above, in this embodiment, three symbols of the inner reel 811 can be displayed on the player side. Therefore, the length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is equal to or more than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, so that the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and the non-transmissive surface of the outer reel 821 is moved to the player. By disposing on the side, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible from the player side.

  The length of the non-transmissive surface 821b in the circumferential direction is not limited to three or more symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, but the circumferential direction in which the decoration of the inner reel 811 cannot be visually recognized from the player side. It is sufficient if the length is formed. That is, it is only necessary to form the non-transmissive surface 821b by the length in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811 that is visible from the player side.

  The non-transmissive surface 821b includes a transmissive region 821b1 that can partially transmit light, and a design 821b2 on which the design is decorated.

  The transmissive region 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 33) when viewed from the front. The transmissive area 821b1 is a part that displays seven segments by being combined with a segment display device 600 described later, and can partially transmit light transmitted through the inner reel 811 to the player side. Thereby, a part of 7-segment display described later can be formed.

  The symbol 821b2 is formed in the circumferential length of three symbols to be decorated on the inner reel 811, and the outer reel so that three symbols 821b2 of each ornamental symbol display device 800 are aligned in parallel in the horizontal direction. By stopping 821, the player can be informed of the occurrence of the big hit state.

  Further, as described above, since the periphery of the symbol 821b2 is not transparent, it is possible to make the inner reel 811 invisible to the player. Therefore, the design of the inner reel 811 can be stopped on the effective line while producing an effect in which three symbols of the design 821b2 are arranged. Therefore, the rotation effect of the outer reel 821 allows the player to watch the inner reel 811 almost simultaneously with the end of the effect of the outer reel 821 after the player has watched the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 taken along the line XXXIV-XXXIV in FIG. FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative symbol display device 800 in the range XXXV in FIG. 36A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36A.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 facing each other. Further, a predetermined interval is provided between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 projecting in the radial direction on one end side (left side in FIG. 34) of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. A gap is formed.

  A protrusion 812a1 is formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 812 so as to protrude toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, formed on an extension line of the spoke 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusion 812a1 is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, wind can be generated by the protrusions 812a1.

  Here, conventionally, the first reel (outer reel unit 820) formed to be rotatable and the first reel (outer reel unit 820) are disposed substantially concentrically and formed to be rotatable. A gaming machine having a second reel (inner reel unit 810) (that is, having a double reel structure) is known. Also known is a technique for removing dust adhering to the display surface of the reel and cleaning it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. Yes.

  However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is, in the double reel structure, a space for disposing the above-described rotating brush between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)). Therefore, the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

  That is, since the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is formed narrow, a decorative symbol display is used to remove dust that has entered and stuck between the opposing surfaces. Since the device 800 needs to be disassembled, it is difficult to clean.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated by the protrusion 812a1, air can be pushed out to generate wind. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  In this case, the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 is made narrower than the space on the inner peripheral side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a. From the space on the inner peripheral side of 824 and the hub 812a, it can flow into a space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  That is, in this embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, and an edge portion 824 that protrudes radially inward from one axial direction of the outer reel 821, and the inner reel unit 810 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the outer surface thereof faces the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined interval, and the inner reel 811 projects radially inward from one axial side of the inner reel 811 and A hub 812a having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the edge portion 824 with a predetermined interval, and the protrusion 812a1 is erected from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge portion 824. The protrusion 812a1 is displaced in the circumferential direction between the outer surface of the hub 812a and generates wind pressure. By using such wind pressure, the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 are It is possible to flow the air. Thereby, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral surface can be cleaned.

  Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the edge portion 824 or the hub 812a, or when a portion in the circumferential direction is partially divided, a gap between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is formed. Since the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, the wind pressure is weakened, and accordingly, the air flows between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. It becomes difficult to let you.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the edge 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a circumferentially continuous surface, so that the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a The wind pressure generated by the protrusion 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can easily flow. As a result, between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 using the wind pressure generated by the displacement of the protrusion 812a1 in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a. The air can be made to flow easily.

  Further, due to the protrusion 812 a 1, the facing distance between the hub 812 a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is partially narrowed in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 can be easily changed by the protrusion 812a1. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to generate wind by utilizing the change in the atmospheric pressure, and the wind is caused to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 so that the inner reel 811 Dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and the dust to be attached can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  More specifically, air has a property of flowing from a high atmospheric pressure to a low atmospheric pressure side, and a portion between the protrusion tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is narrowed, so that the air pressure is partially increased. be able to. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 that hardly changes in atmospheric pressure is the distance between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. Lower than the atmospheric pressure. As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and dust is prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. it can.

  Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protrusion tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge portion 824 can be increased, the protrusion 812a1 is displaced toward the edge portion 824 or the edge portion 824 is displaced (staggered) toward the protrusion 812a1 side. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1 are formed in the spoke 822 that supports the edge 824 and the spoke 812c that supports the hub 812a, the edge is formed through the outer opening 825 and the inner opening 812c1. The air between the inner surface of the portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside (or the air is sucked into the space between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be easily flowed (outflow or inflow). As a result, the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a is used to connect the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. The air in between can be easily flowed.

  Further, a protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (the crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or outer reel unit 820), and the spoke 822 (or spoke 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or inner reel unit 810). Since at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed, it is possible to easily exert the effect of reducing the flow resistance by sucking (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825. That is, when one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected is rotated, the other of the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 that is formed is stopped. The resistance of air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

  The outer reel 821 is formed to be slightly inclined (expanded in diameter) radially outward from the edge 824 (one end) side to which the spoke 822 is connected to the other end side. Therefore, the air flowing from one end side between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be easily sent to the other end side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped, and dust on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. Can be prevented from sticking.

  Further, the inclination angle θ1 of the spoke 812c from the axis of the inner reel 811 to the outer side in the radial direction is larger than the inclination angle θ2 of the spoke 822 from the axis of the outer reel 821 to the outer side in the radial direction (θ1> θ2). Therefore, the spoke 812c and the spoke 822 face each other outward in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 34) when rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) overlapping in the axial direction (left and right direction in FIG. 34). The dimensions in between are increased.

  Therefore, by rotating and displacing one or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 are caused by the difference in distance between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 facing each other. It is possible to easily generate a wind toward the opposite side of the inner peripheral surface.

  More specifically, the separation distance between the spokes 812 c and the spokes 822 facing each other increases in the radial direction of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spoke 812c and the spoke 822 are rotationally displaced to a position where they overlap with each other in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is greater between the spokes 812c and the spokes 822 in the radially inner portions of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Be raised.

  As described above, air has a property of flowing from a high pressure to a low pressure side. Therefore, an air flow from the radially inner portion toward the radially outer portion can be formed. That is, an air flow from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the opposite side of the hub 812a and the edge 824 can be formed. Therefore, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  In addition, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have light transmissivity, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Through the outer reel unit 820, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, since the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 that is rotated more times than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

  In addition, there is no operation of the player as a timing for cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 by rotating the inner reel unit 810 (the game ball is not shot into the game area). This is preferably performed when the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, since the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at a high speed in order to generate wind, the player's interest can be attracted by switching the design of the inner reel 811.

  Further, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while performing an effect of rotationally displacing the non-transparent surface 821b of the outer reel 821 toward the player. In this case, since the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, the cleaning can be performed without making the player visually recognize the cleaning state. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls. Further, since it can be performed in the gaming state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even when the game is continuously performed for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress dust and other dust from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during the game.

  Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 includes a vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, a vertical displacement unit 600R disposed on the right side when viewed from the front, and the left and right vertical displacement units 600L. , 600R and the vertical displacement unit 600C arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and the connecting member 601 is fastened and fixed from the back side.

  Since the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have substantially the same configuration, only the vertical displacement unit 600L disposed on the left side when viewed from the front will be described below to describe the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R. Detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39A is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 39B is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

  40 and 41, the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 are disassembled.

  39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L includes a displacement unit 650 configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 disposed on the left and right sides of the displacement unit 650. Is provided.

  The first segment unit 610 is a unit that can display one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit that can display two segments in the left-right direction. is there. In addition, since the first segment unit 610 is only formed by halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below, and the configuration of the second segment unit 620 will be described. The reference numerals are similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610.

  Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R is formed so that the arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 is different, and the vertical segment unit 610C includes the second segment unit 620 only on the right side when viewed from the front. The vertical displacement unit 610R is provided with the second segment unit 620 in the right side view.

  Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front and two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, the vertical displacement unit 600C can perform two-segment display only on the right side of the front view. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the right side of the front view only. That is, a mode in which one segment is formed on the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R can be adopted.

  Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. 42A is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 42B is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 includes a light transmission member 621 disposed on the front side, a partition member 622 disposed on the back surface of the light transmission member 621, and a partition member 622. A plurality of diffusion members 623 disposed on the back surface of the substrate, a base member 624 disposed between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and a reflection member 625 disposed on both sides of the base member 624 are mainly provided. Formed.

  The light transmissive member 621 is formed of a translucent light transmissive resin material through which light can pass. The light transmissive member 621 is mainly provided with a light transmissive portion 621a formed in a circular arc plate shape convex toward the front side, and a flat portion 621b formed continuously above and below the light transmissive portion 621a. The

  The light transmission part 621a includes a standing wall 621a1 that is erected on the back side from the left and right ends, a fastening part 621a2 that protrudes in an annular shape from the upper and lower ends to the back side, and a vertical direction at the front left and right center position. And a decorative portion 621a3 that is continuously recessed in the back side.

  The standing wall 621a1 is formed so as to stand on the back side from the left and right end portions of the light transmitting portion 621a. The facing dimension between the standing walls 621a1 is set to be substantially the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of a partition member 622 described later. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission part 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

  The fastening portion 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole for fastening a reflection member 625, which will be described later, with a screw, and is formed to project in an annular shape from the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the reflection member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of the screw into the inner edge of the fastening portion 621a2.

  As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the left and right center position of the light transmitting portion 621a. Thereby, it can suppress that the light which permeate | transmits the front view left side reflects inside the decoration part 621a3, and is radiate | emitted from the front view right side. A detailed description of the light transmitted through the decorative portion 621a3 will be described later.

  The flat surface portion 621b is a plate member for fastening with a base member 660 of a displacement unit 650 described later. The flat surface portion 621b is formed in a plate-like body having a front view substantially the same as the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second seg unit 620 are fastened by fastening screws via the flat surface portion 621b. can do.

  In addition, an elastic piece 621b1 protruding to the opposite side is formed to protrude on the plane portion 621b. The elastic piece 621b1 is formed so as to protrude from the opposing side surfaces of the flat portion 621b formed in a pair of upper and lower sides, and protrudes in a curved shape convex toward the front side. Further, the elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape having a smaller radius than the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip thereof is the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the displacement unit 650. It is set as the aspect contact | abutted to the part 883. FIG. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative symbol display device 800 are rotationally driven, the decorative symbol display device 800 can be prevented from vibrating.

  The partition member 622 is formed of a resin material that does not easily transmit light, and is formed in a curved plate state in a side view. In the partition member 622, the radius of the curved outer peripheral surface is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the vertical width (the vertical direction in FIG. 42) is the vertical width of the light transmitting portion 621a. Is set smaller. Therefore, it can arrange | position in the state which earth | grounded the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 to the inner peripheral surface of the light transmissive part 621a.

  In addition, the partition member 622 has a first recessed portion 622a that is recessed from the left and right (left and right sides in FIG. 42) toward the center and a concave from the upper and lower (upper and lower) end surfaces toward the center. It is mainly provided with a second recessed portion 622b provided and a protruding portion 622c protruding from the left and right center position on the back side.

  Two first recessed portions 622a are formed side by side in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides. That is, the first recessed portion 622 a is formed at four locations on the partition member 622.

  The second recessed portion 622b is formed to be recessed from the upper and lower ends. The dimension between the opposing ends of the second recessed portion 622b at the recessed tip is set to be substantially the same as the vertical distance of the fastening portion 621a2 formed in the light transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light transmission member 621, the partition member 622 can be prevented from moving in the vertical direction by inserting the fastening portion 621a2 inside the second recessed portion 622b. .

  The projecting portion 622c is formed to extend in the vertical direction at the center position on the left and right sides of the partition member 622. The projecting portion 622c includes a recess 622c1 that is recessed in the projecting tip surface. The recess 622c1 is formed such that the width dimension in the left-right direction is larger than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described later. Therefore, when the base member 624 is disposed on the partition member 622, the tip side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1. As a result, when the base member 624 is disposed, the base member 624 can be positioned, and the base member 624 can be prevented from moving in the left-right direction.

  The diffusion member 623 is formed of a cloudy resin material and can diffuse light entering the inside. The diffusing member 623 is formed in a plate shape curved in a side view, and the radius of the outer peripheral portion (front side) is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral portion (back side) of the partition member 622. Therefore, the diffusing member 623 can be arranged in a state of being grounded to the back side of the partition member 622.

  In addition, two diffusion members 623 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and two diffusion members 623 are arranged at a predetermined distance on the left and right. That is, four diffusion members 623 are disposed on the back side of the partition member 622.

  The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the facing wall 621 a 1 of the light transmission member 621 and the protruding portion 622 c of the partition member 622. Thereby, when the diffusing member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, it is possible to suppress the diffusing member 623 from moving left and right.

  The diffusing member 623 includes a protruding portion 623a that protrudes to the front side, and a recessed portion 623b that is recessed on the back side of the protruding portion 623a.

  The protruding portion 623a is formed to protrude at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is arranged in a state of being inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. Established. Thereby, when the diffusing member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622, the partition member 622 can be prevented from shifting in the left-right and up-down directions.

  Further, the protruding distance of the protruding portion 623a is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. That is, it is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion 623a and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

  The recessed portion 623b is formed to be recessed in a shape slightly smaller than the front view shape of the protruding portion 623a on the side opposite to the protruding portion 623a (the back side of the diffusing member 623). Is formed. Thereby, the thickness of the plate | board of the diffusing member 623 can be made substantially constant, and distortion when the diffusing member 623 is molded can be suppressed. Moreover, the recessed part 623b can enlarge the area of the back side of the edge part of the protrusion part 623a by forming in a shape a little smaller than the protrusion part 623a. Therefore, the light incident on the diffusing member 623 from the LED 624a described later can be increased at the end of the protruding portion 623a. As a result, it is possible to clearly (clearly) the mode of light visually recognized by the player via the diffusing member 623, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  The base member 624 is formed from a crescent-shaped plate having a curved front side, and includes an LED 624a that irradiates light on a side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the recessed tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, when the base member 624 is disposed on the back surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 is inserted inside the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622, thereby preventing the base member 624 from being displaced in the left-right direction. it can.

  A plurality of LEDs 624 a are arranged on both the left and right side surfaces of the base member 624, and the irradiation direction thereof is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624. That is, the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is the left-right direction. A detailed description of the light irradiation of the LED 624a will be given later.

  One reflection member 625 is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the base member 624. The reflection member 625 is formed from a white resin material, and is formed in an arc shape that is convex on the front side. Further, the radius of the arc of the reflecting member 625 is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the diffusing member 623. Thereby, when the reflecting member 625 is disposed on the back side of the diffusing member 623, the reflecting member 625 and the diffusing member 623 can be grounded.

  The reflection member 625 is formed in a plate-like body that is spaced apart from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the back side to the front side, and an inclined portion 625a that is inclined from the back side toward the front side, and the inclined portion 625a. A concave portion 625b that is formed in a recessed manner on the front side of the main body and a wall portion 625c that protrudes toward the front side at the upper end, the lower end, and the middle portion of the concave portion 625b. Formed.

  The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflection surface 625a1 that reflects the light of the LED 624a of the base member 624 to the front side, and is inclined by about 60 degrees with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. As described above, since the light irradiation direction of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side surface of the base member 624, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined with respect to the side surface of the base member 624. Can be reflected to the front side. A mode in which the LED 624a travels light will be described later.

  The concave portion 625b is formed in a concave curved shape on the back side. Further, the recess 625b is formed at a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, whereby the amount of light of the LED 624a to be visually recognized by the player via the diffusion member 623 can be made uniform. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the progress of light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second seg unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV in FIG. In FIG. 45, a part of the light emitted from the LED 624a is partially shown by a two-dot chain line. In addition, the outline of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed on the left and right back sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the reflection surface 625a1 is formed with an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflection surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle), so that the light The reflection direction can be outward. In this case, since the reflecting member 625 is formed of a plate member having a substantially constant thickness, the space on the side opposite to the reflecting surface 625a1 (the back side of the reflecting member 625) can be increased. Thereby, the edge part of the decoration symbol display apparatus 800 can be arrange | positioned to the back side of the 2nd segment unit 620. FIG.

  Here, the rotation (decorative symbol display device 800) formed so as to be rotatable and arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and at least one disposed between the plurality of rotating cylinders. A light-transmitting decorative member (light-transmitting member 621) and a substrate (base member 624) disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted. There is known a gaming machine in which a board is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning cylinders be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also the pattern on the surface of the decorative member is formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member, An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the design of the decorative member integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum can be performed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently applied to the back surface of the decorative member. The pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. For this reason, there is a problem that the production effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged while the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the reflection member 625 that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light transmission member 621 is provided, the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the light transmission member 621. Even when the base member 624 is disposed, the irradiation range of the light transmissive member 621 to the back surface by the light emitted from the LED 624a can be widened. Therefore, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be increased correspondingly, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be increased, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced, so that a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative design display device 800 can be formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the light transmitting member 621 is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 and has an outer edge up to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 in front view. Since it is formed to extend, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (not easily visible). In addition, since the symbol of the light transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the symbol displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be brought closer, the light transmitting member 621. And the decorative design display device 800 can be easily formed.

  Further, the reflecting member 625 connects the surface of the base member 624 where the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621, so that the region of the base member 624 where the LED 624a is mounted and the design of the light transmitting member 621 are formed. Since the back surface of the reflecting member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 toward the base member 624 from the light transmitting member 621, the light emitted from the LED 624a is surrounded. The back surface of the light transmitting member 621 is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative symbol display device 800 while ensuring the size of the symbol formed (displayed) by the above, and the decorative symbol display device 800 is placed on the back surface of the light transmitting member 621. It is possible to enter the back side (the decorative symbol display device 800 is brought close to the base member 624). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (it is difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

  In addition, since the LED 624a is mounted on both the one surface and the other surface of the base member 624, the light emitted from the LED 624a mounted on the one surface and the other surface are mounted. Different designs can be independently formed (displayed) on the light transmitting member 621 depending on the light emitted from the LED 624a.

  In this case, the number of base members 624 disposed between the decorative symbol display devices 800 arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, the space necessary for disposing the base member 624 can be reduced, and accordingly, the decorative design display device 800 is inserted into the back side of the light transmitting member 621 (the decorative design display device 800 is brought close to the base member 624). Can). As a result, the end face in the axial direction of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (it is difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative symbol display device 800 can be easily formed.

  Further, as described above, the reflection surface 625a1 is formed to be inclined at an obtuse angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624 (that is, the light emitted from the LED 624a and the reflection surface 625a1 intersect at an acute angle). The reflection direction can be outward. Thereby, the reflecting member 625 can be made smaller (than when the reflecting surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side surface of the base member 624). Therefore, the space on the back side of the second segment unit 620 can be ensured accordingly. As a result, since the second segment unit 620 and the decorative design display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, it is easy to form a sense of unity between the light transmitting member 621 and the decorative design display device 800.

  Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 46 is a side view of the base member 624. FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second seg unit 620 along the XLVII-XLVII line of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape when viewed from the side, and can emit light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged at an interval of an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction about the same axis as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. Thereby, the heat stored in the base member 624 by irradiation of the LED 624a can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the base member 624 from being partially heated and damaging the LED 624a.

  In the present embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are dispersedly arranged in the circumferential direction. The LED 624a is disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface formed in a square is along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the base member 624.

  Here, conventionally, a substrate (base member 624) on which a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted and a transmission member (light transmission member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light emission means are provided. There is known a gaming machine in which the light transmission part 621a) of the transmission member 621 is formed to be curved and a plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the curve of the transmission member. In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (string) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased because the interval between the light emitting means adjacent to some of the light emitting means is narrowed. Therefore, heat concentrates on some of the light emitting means, and the life is likely to be shortened.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the LEDs 624a are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between the adjacent LEDs 624a in each LED 624a can be made constant, and the distribution of heat generated by the LEDs 624a can be made uniform. As a result, the concentration of heat on some of the LEDs 624a can be suppressed, and the life of each LED 624a can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 47, one recess 625b is formed on the back side (right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. Further, the separation distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) in the up-down direction of one recess 625b to the other end side (upper end portion) is set to be the same.

  Here, as described above, the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an inclination angle θ1. Therefore, the vertical interval between the LEDs 624a is narrower in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 46) than in the vertical direction outside. Accordingly, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting member 625 and irradiated to the player side increases toward the center in the vertical direction (the center side in the vertical direction becomes dark), and makes the player visually recognize the light uniformly. There was a problem that it was not possible.

  In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the light transmission portion 621a, the plurality of LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals in the front view of the light transmission portion 621a. Will be arranged. That is, in the front view of the light transmission part 621a, a region where the distance between the LEDs 624a is narrow and a wide region are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the light amount becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a reflection member 625 that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a toward the light transmission portion 621a is provided, and the reflection member 625 includes a plurality of recesses 625b that are partitioned corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 624a. Since the partition widths of the plurality of recesses 625b in the front view of the light transmission part 621a are set to be substantially the same, the light amounts of the respective recesses 625b visually recognized in the front view of the light transmission part 621a can be made substantially the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

  That is, the distance X1 from one end side (lower end portion) to the other end side (upper end portion) in the vertical direction of one concave portion 625b is set to be the same, so that the player is irradiated by the irradiation of one LED 624a. The region of the light emitted to the side can be made substantially the same in the vertical direction. Therefore, it can suppress that the quantity of the light irradiated to a player side increases to the center side of an up-down direction. As a result, the player can see the light uniformly.

  Further, since the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, for example, light diffusibility can be ensured compared to a case where the light emitting surface is circular (light is emitted at a wider angle). Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one recess 625b.

  The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the front-view rectangular shape of the light emitting surface means that the front-view shape of the encapsulating resin (front-view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

  Furthermore, since at least a part of the plurality of LEDs 624a is disposed in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface is along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a, the light emitted from the LED 624a is transmitted to the light transmitting portion 621a. It is easy to diffuse uniformly along the curvature of the. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the light transmission part 621a can be made uniform.

  In addition, the concave portion 625b is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a and is recessed toward the side away from the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the light emitting surface of the LED 624a is between the light transmitting portion 621a and the concave portion 625b. Therefore, the base member 624 can be disposed in a posture orthogonal to the light transmission portion 621a. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in disposing the unit composed of the light transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625. In this case, since the concave portion 625b is disposed so as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the LED 624a from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected by the concave portion 625b is transmitted to the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. Can be uniformly incident. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the light transmission part 621a can be made uniform.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, an aspect of light emitted from the LED 624a will be described. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In FIG. 48, the light emitted from the LED 624a is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the reference numeral of the irradiation region SR1 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first seg unit 610 is irradiated with light from two irradiation regions SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). In addition, the second seg unit 620 is irradiated with light from the irradiation region SR1 arranged 2 × 2 vertically and horizontally. The irradiation region SR1 of the second segment unit 620 is formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light transmission member 621.

  Therefore, the left and right sides of the number in the 7-segment display can be displayed by the irradiation area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the irradiation area SR1 of the second segment unit 620. In addition, the upper and lower sides and the center of the number by 7 segment display are mentioned later.

  Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 49 and 50 show the disassembled state of the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 includes a pair of left and right base members 660, a displacement member 670 that is pivotally supported by the base member 660, and a base member 660. The driving means 680 for transmitting the rotational driving of the driving motor KM3 to the displacement member 670 is mainly provided.

  The base member 660 is formed of a pair of plate members on the left and right sides of a shape having a space larger than the decorative symbol display device 800 described above at the center. Further, the first segment unit 610 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the second segment unit 620 is disposed on the front side of the base member 660 on the right side when viewed from the front. Note that the base member 660 is disposed on the left and right sides upside down, and in this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side in the front view is described, and the description on the base member 660 on the left side in the front view is omitted.

  The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and includes a protruding portion 661 that protrudes in a convex shape from the side surface on the front side to the front side. The base member 660 has a through hole 662 that passes through the shaft of the drive motor KM3 provided at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction and a connection provided at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction. An insertion hole 663 through which the rod 681 is inserted, a recess 664 in which a later-described displacement member 670 is pivotally supported, a sliding groove 665 formed in an arc shape around the axis of the recess 664, and the upper and lower sides of the recess 664 And an engaging portion 666 protruding to the venue.

  The protrusion 661 is set such that the radius of the protrusion tip is smaller than the radius on the inner peripheral surface of the reflection member 625 described above, and the curve axis thereof is set substantially on the same straight line as the curve axis of the reflection member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are disposed on the base member 660, the protrusion 661 and the reflection member 625 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 can be opposed. It is possible to suppress intrusion between the opposing base members 660. As a result, the temperature of the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the opposing base member 660 rises, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotationally drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being broken.

  The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to the shaft are inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Is set. Therefore, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660 with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3. The drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposite side of the opposing base member 660.

  The through-hole 662 is a hole into which a connecting rod 681 of a driving unit 680 described later is inserted. The through-hole 662 is formed larger than the outer shape of the connecting rod 681 and is formed at both upper and lower ends of the base member 660.

  The recess 664 is formed in a circular recess from the opposite side of the base member 660 toward the outside. The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of a connection projection 671b of a displacement member 670 described later. Accordingly, the connection protrusion 671b can be inserted and disposed inside the recess 664.

  The sliding groove 665 can connect the displacement member 670 and the driving means 680 disposed outside the pair of base members 660 by inserting the connection protrusion 671 b of the displacement member 670. Further, since the connecting protrusion 671b is inserted into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

  The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposite side of the base member 660 with a gap whose tip is larger than the diameter of the opposite side surface of the base member 660 and one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later. As a result, one end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the engaging portion 666.

  The displacement members 670 are disposed in a pair of upper and lower sides in opposite directions. The displacement member 670 is formed of an extending member 671 whose one end is pivotally supported by the base member 660 and a decoration unit 672 connected to the other end of the extending member 671.

  The extending members 671 are formed in a substantially L-shaped plate shape, and are disposed in a pair in opposite directions. The extending member 671 includes a shaft support hole 671a penetrating in the left-right direction at one end on the long side, a connecting projection 671b projecting left and right outward at a substantially central position in the long direction on the long side, and a shaft support hole 671a from the side surface on the long side. The projections 671d projecting in the circumferential direction and the elastic members 671f made of an elastic material and disposed on the side surface of the extending member 671 are mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, the collar C is inserted into the shaft support hole 671a, and the collar C is fastened and fixed to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw so that the displacement member 670 can be connected to the base member 660 in a rotatable state. it can.

  Further, the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 are coaxially disposed, and the collar C is inserted into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastened and fixed to the base member 660. A displacement member 670 is arranged to be rotatable on the same axis.

  Further, the left and right extending members 671 are formed with a bulging portion 671a1 that bulges outward in the left-right direction around one shaft support hole 671a. The bulging portion 671a1 is formed so that its outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the concave portion 664 of the base member 660. The bulging portion 671a1 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the bulging portion 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side, the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side is formed. In this state, it is arranged inside the bulging portion 671a1. On the other hand, the left shaft support hole 671a is formed with a bulged portion 671a1 in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, so that the left shaft support hole of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side is formed. The hole 671a is placed inside the bulging portion 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

  Accordingly, when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660 by the collar C, the bulging portion 671a1 can be inserted into the recess 664. As a result, when force is applied in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulging portion 671a1 and the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664 come into contact with each other, so that the shaft support hole 671a or Damage to the color C can be suppressed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are disposed coaxially with the base member 660, and accordingly, the axial length of the collar C is increased correspondingly. Therefore, when a force is applied in the radial direction to the rotation shaft of the displacement member 670, the force is easily applied to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged. When the bulging portion 671a1 and the concave portion 664 come into contact with each other, the force acting in the radial direction with respect to the rotation shaft of the displacement member 670 is maintained. can do. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

  The protrusion 671d is formed with a through hole 671d1 penetrating in the longitudinal direction on the longitudinal side of the extending member 671. The through hole 671d1 is a hole through which torsion springs SP1 and SP2 described later are inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

  The elastic member 671f is disposed on a side surface of the extending member 671 on the side closer to each other of a pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 described later. In addition, when the upper and lower extending members 671 are disposed at positions close to each other, the size is set such that the side surfaces of the elastic members 671f are in contact with each other. Thereby, it is possible to absorb an impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to positions close to each other.

  The drive unit 680 is a unit that transmits the power of the drive motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. The driving means 680 includes a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the driving motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 that meshes with the gear 682, a rod-shaped body having one end connected to the side surface of the large-diameter gear 683, and the other end. A first link member 684 connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 for transmitting power to the opposite side through the base member 660, a cam member 685 connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotating, A second link member 686 that is formed in a rod-like body and has one end rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end connected to the displacement member 670 is mainly formed.

  As described above, the gear 682 is connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

  The large-diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and includes a gear surface 683a formed on a tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b protruding in an annular shape on the side surface in the rotation axis direction. Formed. Since the gear surface 683a meshes with the gear 682, the large diameter gear 683 is rotated by the rotation of the gear 682. That is, the drive motor KM3 is rotated by being driven to rotate.

  The protrusion 683b is formed to project in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotational axis.

  The first link member 684 is formed in a rod-like body, and insertion holes 684a and 684b are formed at both ends thereof so as to penetrate in the left-right direction.

  The insertion hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. The projection 683b is inserted into the insertion hole 684a, and the tip of the projection 683b is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684a, whereby the first link member 684 can be rotated to the large diameter gear 683. Can be linked in a state.

  The insertion hole 684b is a hole into which the connection protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671b. The connection protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 684b, and the first link member 684 can be rotated to the displacement member 670 by fastening the tip of the connection protrusion 671b with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b. Can be connected in a stable state.

  Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotated via the gear 682, the projection 683b is rotationally displaced about the rotational axis of the large-diameter gear 683 along with the rotational displacement of the large-diameter gear 683, and the projection 683b The first link member 684 connected at one end is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the first link member 684 is displaced.

  One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, and is fitted into the rotary shaft portion of the large-diameter gear 683. On the other hand, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to the cam member 685. Therefore, the connecting rod 681 rotates and the cam member 685 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor KM3.

  The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and a connecting rod 681 is fitted into the shaft portion thereof. Further, the cam member 685 includes a protrusion 685a that protrudes in an annular shape outward from the side surface in the axial direction. The protrusion 685 a is formed to project in an annular shape, and its axis is arranged at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle having the rotational axis as the center.

  The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as the shape of the first link member 684 reversed left and right. The second link member 686 includes insertion holes 686a and 686b at both ends in the longitudinal direction.

  The insertion hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 685a. The projection 685a is inserted into the insertion hole 686a, and the tip of the projection 685a is fastened with a screw having a head outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 686a, so that the second link member 686 can be rotated to the cam member 685. Can be linked with.

  The insertion hole 686b is a hole into which the connection protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connection protrusion 671b. The connection protrusion 671b is inserted into the insertion hole 686b, and the distal end of the connection protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose outer diameter of the head is larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole 684b, whereby the second link member 686 can be rotated to the displacement member 670. Can be connected in a stable state.

  Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the projection 685a is rotationally displaced about the rotation axis of the cam member 685 along with the rotational displacement of the cam member 685, and one end of the projection 685a is one end. The second link member 686 to be connected is displaced, and the displacement member 670 connected to the other end of the second link member 686 is displaced.

  In other words, the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686 are displaced. Here, since the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 670 from tilting when it is displaced. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

  Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51A is a front view of the displacement member 670, and FIG. 51B is a side view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 670 along line LIII-LIII in 51 (a).

  As described above, the displacement member 670 includes the extending member 671 that is rotatably supported by the base member 660 and the decoration unit 672 that is connected to the extending member 671.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the extending member 671 includes a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the short side (the connecting side of the decoration unit 672). A step portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a step shape is formed on a surface of the extending member 671 arranged in a pair on the left and right sides of the connecting portions 671c facing each other. The step portions 671c1 are alternately formed on the left and right sides, and the step portions 671c1 are engaged with each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Thereby, a dimensional error can be absorbed when the extending member 671 is molded.

  The decoration unit 672 is a unit that includes an LED that irradiates light inside, and irradiates the player side with light. The decoration unit 672 includes a back cover 673 disposed on the back side, a front cover 676 that covers the back cover 673 and is disposed on the front side of the back cover 673, a back cover 673, and a front cover 676. The base member 674 disposed between the opposite members and the diffusion member 675 and the lens member 677 disposed between the base member 674 and the front cover 676 are mainly provided.

  The back cover 673 is formed in a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extending member 671 is fastened to the back side. Thereby, the decoration unit 672 and the extending member 671 can be fastened.

  Further, the back cover 673 is formed from a resin material that does not easily transmit light (ie, does not transmit light). The back cover 673 includes a reflecting portion 673a formed to be recessed on the back side at a position facing a diffusion member 675 described later.

  The reflection portion 673a is formed on the lower edge portion of the back cover 673 in the left-right direction, and white coating with high light reflectance is applied to the inner surface thereof. Thereby, the light irradiated to the inner side of the reflection part 673a can be reflected inside the reflection part 673a and irradiated to the diffusion member 675 side.

  The front cover 676 is formed so that the shape of the front view is substantially the same as the shape of the back cover 673 and covers the front side of the back cover 673. Further, the front cover 676 is formed of a resin material that can transmit light, and can emit light emitted from first and second LEDs 674a and 2LED described later to the front side (player side).

  The base member 674 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular plate-like body that is smaller than the back cover 673 when viewed from the front. On the front side of the base member 674, a first LED 674 a that is arranged side by side with the lower edge portion and irradiates light on the diffusing member 675 side, and is disposed above the first LED 674 a, and the lens member 677 receives light. And the second LED 674b that irradiates the light.

  The first LED 674a is disposed at a position facing the upper end of the diffusing member 675, and is disposed so as to be able to irradiate light downward in the base member 674. Thereby, it can suppress that the light irradiated from 1st LED 674a injects into the lens member 677 mentioned later. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side via the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side via the lens member 677, and the player's interest is impaired. Can be suppressed.

  The second LED 674b is disposed above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the light of the second LED 674b can be made incident on the lens member 677 disposed on the upper portion of the diffusion member 675.

  The diffusing member 675 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the lower end on the back side of the front cover 676. The diffusion member 675 is formed of a cloudy resin material that can diffuse light incident on the diffusion member 675. Thereby, the light emitted from the first LED 674a and incident on the diffusion member 675 can be diffused to make the light uniform and emitted to the front side (player side).

  The lens member 677 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the upper end on the back side of the front cover 676. The lens member 677 is formed of a transparent resin material, and a plurality of protrusions are formed on the back side (not shown). Thereby, the light emitted from the second LED 674b can be easily incident on the inside by the projection on the back side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674b is reduced, light can be incident on the lens member 677, and light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a mode of light emitted to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 by the first LED 674a will be described. FIG. 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. In FIG. 54, a region of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and an irradiation region SR2 is attached with a symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the region of light emitted to the player side by the first LED 674a is a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction at the lower end of the decoration unit 672 (front cover 676). Since the displacement member 670 is disposed at both the upper and lower ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, the irradiation region SR2 is formed at a position separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction by the displacement member 670. Therefore, the upper and lower numbers can be displayed by the 7-segment display by the irradiation region SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670.

  Next, the 7-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and the decorative symbol display device 800. 55 and 56 show a state in which the transmission region 821b1 of the outer reel 821 is rotated to the player side, and the irradiation region SR1, the irradiation region SR2, and the transmission region 821b1 are shown by two-dot chain lines. The

  As shown in FIG. 55, two irradiation regions SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are formed side by side in the vertical direction and six in the horizontal direction. It is assumed that it is in a state.

  The irradiation region SR1 is formed as a set of four in the form of sandwiching the decorative symbol display device 800, and three sets are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. Between the pair of irradiation areas SR1, the irradiation areas SR2 are arranged above and below, and the transmission areas 821b1 are arranged at the upper and lower intermediate positions. Therefore, the seven-segment number can be displayed by the seven irradiation areas SR1 and SR2 and the transmission area 821b1.

  As described above, since one set of four irradiation regions SR1 is arranged in parallel in the left-right direction, a 7-segment display is formed in each set. That is, three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

  Therefore, a 7-segment display arranged in parallel in the left-right direction can be displayed as an effective line of a lottery for the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a 7-segment display is displayed on all 7-segment displays). .) Thus, not only jackpot display by the decorative symbol display device 800 described above but also jackpot display by 7 segment display can be performed. As a result, since the player can visually recognize a plurality of display forms, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Here, since the light transmission part 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 is formed to be curved in a convex shape on the front side, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments. The display at the center in the vertical direction close to the player increases and the display at both ends in the vertical direction far from the player decreases. For this reason, there has been a problem that it is impossible for the player to clearly display the number display by 7 segments.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width dimension in the left-right direction is sequentially increased as the 7-segment display is moved from the vertical center position to the vertical ends. Thereby, the display by 7 segments in an up-and-down edge part and an up-and-down center position can be made uniform as a whole. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the number display by 7 segments.

  Furthermore, the 7-segment display formed on the left and right sides is formed such that the central portion in the vertical direction is inclined toward the central side in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments formed on the left and right sides.

  That is, the player's viewpoint is normally located at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the segment display device 600 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the 7 segments displayed in the center. Therefore, as the player is more visually separated from the player's viewpoint, the 7-segment display is more visually recognized by the player due to the curved shape of the light transmitting portion 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620. Since the center portion in the vertical direction of the 7-segment display is formed to be inclined toward the central side in the left-right direction, it is difficult to visually recognize the 7-segment display in a curved manner from the viewpoint of the player. As a result, the player can visually recognize the display of the seven segments.

  Next, a displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIGS. 57A to G01 (c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 58 (a), 59 (a) and 60 (a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and FIGS. 58 (b), 59 (a) and 60 (b) are similar to FIG. It is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the LVIIIb-LVIIIb line | wire of (a).

  57 (a), 58 (a), and 58 (b) show the state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in the retracted state, and FIGS. 57 (b), 59 (a), and 59 are shown. FIG. 57B shows a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed in an intermediate state. In FIGS. 57C, 60A, and 60B, the displacement member 670 is disposed in an overhanging state. The state is illustrated.

  Further, the retracted state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are spaced apart from each other in the upper and lower sides, and the protruding state of the displacement member 670 is a displacement in which the upper and lower pairs are disposed. The member 670 is in contact with the upper and lower intermediate positions, and the intermediate state of the displacement member 670 is a state in which the displacement member 670 is disposed between the retracted state and the extended state.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 58, at the position where the displacement member 670 is in the retracted state, the displacement member 670 disposed above the upper pair (upward in FIG. 57) is the first By positioning the link member 684 and the second link member 686 upward, the decoration unit 672 is positioned upward with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis.

  Further, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above has a base end portion on the other end side (side inserted into the through hole 671d1) at the engagement position with the through hole 671d1. It is said. Therefore, the urging force applied by the torsion spring SP1 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the decoration unit 672 is disposed on the upper side in the gravity direction on the displacement member 670.

  On the other hand, the displacement member 670 arranged below the pair of upper and lower pairs (the lower side in FIG. 57) has the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 positioned below, so that the shaft support hole 671a is formed. The decoration unit 672 is positioned below as the rotation axis.

  Further, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed below has a base end portion on the other end side (side inserted into the through hole 671d1) at the engagement position with the through hole 671d1. It is said. Therefore, the urging force applied by the torsion spring SP2 can be increased. As a result, the decoration unit 672 can be easily displaced to the upper side in the gravity direction by the displacement member 670.

  In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decoration unit 762, and the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. In this case, as described above, three symbols displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side in the vertical direction.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in FIGS. 57A and 58, the large-diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. Thereby, the 1st link member 684 and the 2nd link member 686 are displaced to the approximate vertical center position of the up-and-down displacement unit 600L. Accordingly, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b and 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and is in the state shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 59. Via FIG. 57 (c) and the state shown in FIG. 60.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above is penetrated. The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is an intermediate position on the other end side (side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by changing the engagement position.

  Similarly to the torsion spring SP2 torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side, the engagement position with the through hole 671d1 is the other end side (inserted into the through hole 671d1). Side) intermediate position. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by changing the engagement position.

  In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than the retracted state is formed between the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 facing the decoration unit 762, and the decorative symbol display device 800 disposed inside the vertical displacement unit 600L can be visually recognized. . In this case, one symbol displayed on the inner reel 811 of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be displayed on the player side.

  Therefore, the displacement member 670 is displaced from the retracted state in which three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811 are displayed in the vertical direction to the intermediate state in which one diagram side decorated on the inner reel 811 is displayed in the vertical direction. A plurality of the production modes can be formed, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying one figure side decorated on the inner reel 811 in the vertical direction, one symbol can be noticed by the player. Therefore, since it is possible to clarify the part to be noticed, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the effect. As a result, it can suppress that a player's interest falls.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed above is penetrated. The engagement position with the hole 671d1 is the tip position on the other end side (side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by changing the engagement position.

  Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 disposed on the lower side has an engagement position with the other end side (inserted into the through hole 671d1). The tip position on the other side. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the intermediate state by changing the engagement position.

  That is, the urging force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made non-linear with the displacement of the displacement member 670. Thereby, the required urging force can be easily applied from the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

  In the overhanging state, the decoration unit 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is brought into contact with the intermediate position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In this case, the decorative unit 672 is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 800, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 800 can be made invisible from the player side (front side).

  Therefore, by placing the displacement member 670 in the overhanging state, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced, and then the displacement member 670 is displaced to an intermediate state or a retracted state, so that the player has a uniform pattern ( It ’s easy to get a sense of expectation) As a result, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the displacement members 670 arranged in the upper and lower pairs are displaced by the same amount has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two drive motors KM3 is rotationally driven. Thus, the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair of upper and lower sides can be displaced to the position of the intermediate state or the overhanging state only on one side.

  Further, the maximum amount of displacement of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 is not set at the intermediate position, and can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. That is, it can be displaced up and down while the pair of displacement members 670 are in contact with each other.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 61 to 63, the transition state of the displacement member 670 is illustrated in order.

  61 to 63, U is given to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670, and the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In the following description, the reference numeral D is added to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the side and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the vertical displacement unit 600L, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 670 is disposed on both the left and right sides. The pair of extending members 671 includes a driven side where the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted via the connecting rod 681, and a driving side where the driving force of the driving motor KM3 is transmitted by the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683. Connected to either one.

  As shown in FIG. 62, when the upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

  As shown in FIG. 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 62, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction. .

  Here, a first displacement member (decoration unit 672U) and a first displacement member formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and displaceable in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. A gaming machine including a two-displacement member (decoration unit 672D) is known. According to such a gaming machine, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought close to a position where the opposing sides come into contact with each other, so that an object (for example, the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, The liquid crystal display device and the production member) are shielded, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in directions away from each other, so that the shield is released along with the displacement and the object can be visually recognized. It is possible to produce an effect. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocal displacement in one direction and the other direction) in a state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other, while maintaining shielding of the object. Further, it is possible to perform an effect before the cancellation of the shielding (effect that focuses attention on the cancellation operation of the shielding).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to closely contact the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed. If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of the effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base member 660 is provided with the drive unit 680U and the drive unit 680D that support the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D to be displaceable on the base member 660, respectively. The opposite side of the decoration unit 672D whose aspect is biased to one side of the opposite side of the decoration unit 672U and is opposite to the other side of the opposite side of the decoration unit 672D that is in contact with the one side of the decoration unit 672U Since the support mode of the drive unit 680D is biased to one side, the support mode of the drive unit 680U and the support mode of the drive unit 680D are in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other. To opposite sides (sides rotated 180 ° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposite side) It is possible to 倚. Thereby, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed (see FIG. 63).

  In the present embodiment, since the number of components disposed on one side and the other side (both sides in the left-right direction) is different, the driving force transmitted to the left and right of the decoration unit 672 is different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are The high rigidity side (low side) of the user can face the low rigidity side (high side) of the other party. Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the high rigidity side, and the low rigidity side Then you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

  The driving means 680U transmits the driving force of the driving motor KM3U to the driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that couple the decoration unit 672U to the base member, and the pair of extending members 671U. And a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U that are different from each other, and the driving means 680D includes a pair of extending members that connect the driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force and the decoration unit 672D to the base member 660. Since there are provided a second link member 686D and a first link member 684D that transmit the driving force of the drive motor KM3U to the pair of extending members 671U and have different configurations from each other, the decorative unit 672U and Easily bring the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672D into close contact Can, it is possible to suppress the gap formed between the opposing sides each other.

  That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, for example, the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D are configured so that, for example, on the side where the driving force is large or the transmission timing of the driving force is In addition to pushing in (moving forward) the opponent, it is possible to form a state in which the opponent is received (retracted) on the side where the driving force is small or the transmission timing of the driving force is later. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

  The extending member 671U and the extending member 671D are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the decoration unit 672U or the decoration unit 672D, and the other end side is coaxially rotated with the base member 660. Since the support unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction while abutting the opposing sides, the opposing sides are not affected even if the bias of the support mode is used. It is easy to maintain the contact state.

  Further, the extending member 671U or the extending member 671D is provided with an elastic member 671f formed of a rubber-like elastic material. When the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the elastic member 671f is elastic. Since the body is interposed between the extending member 671U and the extending member 671D in an elastically compressed state, the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other. Even when using the bias of the support mode, the state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other can be easily maintained.

  Further, as described above, the driving means 680U includes the driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, the pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and that connects the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and Two torsion springs SP1 that respectively apply different urging forces to the pair of extending members 671U are provided, and the driving means 680D is driven by the driving motor KM3D that generates the driving force and the decoration unit 672D. Are connected to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different urging forces to the pair of extending members 671D, respectively, so that the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are opposed to each other. It is easy to bring the sides into close contact, and between the opposite sides It can be suppressed gap is formed.

  That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the side having a large urging force, for example. On the side where power is small, a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent can be formed. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

  The two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. That is, the urging forces applied to the pair of extending members 671U may be different from each other by different positions at which the urging forces are applied or different elastic deformation amounts. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

  Further, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extending members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and that connects the decoration unit 672U to the base member 660, and the pair of extending members. A first urging member for applying an urging force to one of 671U, and the driving means 680D is driven by the driving motor KM3D for generating the driving force, and the decoration unit 672D is a base member. Since a pair of extending members 671D coupled to 660 and a second urging member for applying a urging force to one of the pair of extending members 671D, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are provided. Can be made to adhere closely, and it can control that a crevice is formed between opposite sides.

  That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving unit 680U and the driving unit 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the side on which the urging force is applied, for example. On the side where the urging force is not applied, a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent can be formed. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

  As described above, one leg is connected to the extending member 671U and the other leg is connected to the base member 660 as a torsion spring, and the urging force in the direction to bring the decoration unit 672U close to the decoration unit 672D is applied. Since the torsion spring SP1 to be applied is provided, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced in the direction close to the decoration unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate the extending member 671U is applied to the torsion spring SP1. It can be assisted by the biasing force. Therefore, for example, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced from the retracted position away from the decoration unit 672D from the stop state to the contact position where the decoration unit 672U contacts the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be started smoothly.

  In this case, as the extending member 671U is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672U is brought closer to the decoration unit 672D, the connection position of one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied is increased, so that the decoration unit 672U is attached in the direction of approaching the decoration unit 672D. You can weaken the power. Therefore, for example, when stopping the decoration unit 672U brought close to the decoration unit 672D, the displacement can be surely stopped, so that damage due to the collision can be suppressed. Further, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement is increased. This can improve the production effect.

  On the other hand, the torsion spring is formed and one leg is connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the torsion is applied to apply a biasing force in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D comes close to the decoration unit 672U. As the extension member 671D is rotated in the direction of bringing the decoration unit 672D closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connecting position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other of the torsion spring SP2 is provided. Since at least one of the connecting positions of the leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both, and this is particularly effective. Further, the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are at the same height (arranged at the position in the gravitational direction), the position where the two come into contact is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravitational direction, and the position where the two are separated from each other The configuration of the torsion spring SP1 and the torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when the (retraction position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

  Since the decoration unit 672U is moved closer to the decoration unit 672D by the upward displacement in the gravity direction, the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the gravity direction is increased as the decoration unit 672U is positioned lower in the gravity direction. It can be strengthened (that is, the urging force in the direction of displacing the decoration unit 672U upward in the gravity direction can be weakened as the decoration unit 672U is positioned above the gravity direction).

  Therefore, when the decoration unit 672U is displaced (raised) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the gravitational direction, the displacement (rise) can be started smoothly, and when the raised decoration unit 672U is stopped. Can stop the displacement reliably not only by the action of gravity but also by the weakening of the biasing force. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage accompanying the collision with the decoration unit 672D. On the other hand, when stopping the decoration unit 672U that is displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity, the biasing force is strengthened so that the biasing force counters the action of gravity that continues to descend. Can do. As a result, the decoration unit 672U can be reliably stopped.

  A torsion spring SP2 which is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the extending member 671D and the other leg is connected to the base member 660 and applies a biasing force in a direction to separate the decoration unit 672D from the decoration unit 672U. And the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by the upward displacement in the direction of gravity. Therefore, when the decoration unit 672D is displaced in a direction away from the decoration unit 672U, that is, the decoration unit 672D is moved in the direction of gravity. When it is necessary to displace (raise) against the above, the driving force of the driving motor KM3D required to rotate the extending member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

  In this case, as the extending member 671D is rotated in the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is brought closer to the decoration unit 672U, the connection position of one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 Since at least one of the connecting positions with the base member 660 is separated from the winding portion, the direction in which the decoration unit 672D is separated from the decoration unit 672U by the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied (the direction of gravity) The urging force in the upward direction) can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed. Can be improved and the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the rotation member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusions 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 are formed in a mountain shape inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a has been described. However, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment has The formed projection 2812a is formed in a curved hemisphere. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 64A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. FIG. 64 (a) corresponds to FIG. 36 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 is formed with a projection 2812a1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

  The protrusion 2812a1 is formed in a bowl shape. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  In addition, since the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is formed in a bowl shape, the rigidity can be made higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is driven to rotate, the projection 2812a can be prevented from being damaged when the tip of the projection 2812a1 comes into contact with the spoke 822 of the outer reel unit 820.

  Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812 has been described. However, in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge 824. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 66 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 66 (b) is FIG. 66 (a). It is sectional drawing of the outer reel unit 820 in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, a protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge 824 on the extension line of the spoke 3822 of the outer reel unit 820 so as to protrude toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810. The protrusion 3824a is formed on the outer (outer reel 821 side) end of each spoke 3822.

  The protrusion 3824a is formed so that both sides thereof are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out and wind can be generated. Further, the pushed air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810 and flows into between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusions 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 are formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a has been described. However, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment is described. The protrusions 4812a formed on the surface are inclined with respect to the radial direction of the hub 812a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  67 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 68 (a) is a partially enlarged view of a rotating member 4812, and FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 68 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation member 4812 in the LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb line.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with a protrusion 4812a1 protruding toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

  The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view, and is formed in such a manner that the longitudinal direction thereof intersects the radial direction of the hub 812a. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end. In addition, the inclination direction is inclined to the normal rotation direction side of the inner reel unit 810.

  Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge portion 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, thereby flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  Further, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radially outer end of the hub 812a toward the radially inner end, and the inclined direction is the normal rotation of the inner reel unit 810. Since the inner side reel unit 810 is rotated, it is possible to easily generate wind. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to have light transmittance, and a plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810. Through the outer reel unit 820, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. In this case, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which is rotated more times than the outer reel unit 820. In the production by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, an inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed so as to be inclined toward the edge 824 side of the outer reel unit 820 as it goes radially outward. Then, the spoke 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 is formed so as to be inclined to the opposite side to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as it goes radially outward. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70A is a partially enlarged view of the annular member 813, and FIG. 70B is a cross-sectional view of the annular member 813 taken along the line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 800 according to the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the inner reel unit 5810 in the fifth embodiment is inclined to the side opposite to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as the spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 go radially outward. Formed. Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetric.

  Further, a protrusion 5813a is formed to protrude from the surface of the annular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 that faces the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 70). A plurality of protrusions 5813 a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the annular member 813.

  The protrusion 5813 a is formed in a mountain shape that is inclined on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. Thus, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Further, the pushed air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  Here, when the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800, they are located between the opposing sides (the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820). Since the air cannot be sufficiently sent to the space between the drive motors KM1 and KM2 for driving the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 break down. There was a fear.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection 5813a can generate a flow of air that flows between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. As a result, it is possible to easily inhale air from both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 800. Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, since the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, it is possible to suppress the failure of the drive motors KM1 and KM2.

  Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810 has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 71 is a cross-sectional view of a decorative symbol display device 800 in the sixth embodiment. 72A is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and FIG. 72B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 6812 taken along the line LXXIIb-LXXIIb of FIG. 72A. 73 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and FIG. 73 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the hub 812 a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with a protrusion 6812 a 1 that protrudes toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. Further, the protrusion 6812a1 is formed in a mountain shape in which both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

  A protrusion 6824a that protrudes toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed on the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Further, the protrusion 6824a is formed in a mountain shape whose both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

  The protrusion 6812a1 is formed on the radially inner side of the rotating member 6812 with respect to the protrusion 6824a. Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusion 6812a1 can be prevented from colliding with the protrusion 6824a.

  Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, wind can be generated by the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a. That is, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

  In this case, the air pushed out to either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can be made to collide with either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a, so that the air flow can be further regulated. Therefore, the flow of air flowing between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel can be accelerated. Thus, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be blown off. As a result, dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  That is, in the sixth embodiment, since the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a are erected on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a in different radial directions, the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is provided. In any case, the protrusion 8624a and the protrusion 6812a can be displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. Therefore, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased in the effect produced by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810.

  Inclined surfaces are formed on the surfaces of the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a facing each other in the radial direction. Thereby, the air resistance when air flows in the radial direction can be reduced. As a result, dust (dust) stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 and dust to be stuck can be easily blown off.

  Further, the arrangement interval in the circumferential direction of the protrusion 6812a1 and the arrangement interval in the circumferential direction of the protrusion 6824a are formed at different intervals. Thereby, the position where the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction can be shifted. Therefore, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction, so that a plurality of positions where air is compressed can be dispersed. As a result, the protrusion 6812a1 and the protrusion 6824a overlap in the radial direction and the air is compressed, so that it is possible to suppress the rotation speed of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77, a rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the first electric combination 520 is driven in the same manner in the left-right symmetry has been described. However, in the seventh embodiment, the first electric combination 520 is driven differently on the left and right. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 74, the rotation member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 74A is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74B is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 has two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view in parallel with a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and a connecting portion 533a between the opposing ends on one end side. Are connected to each other. In addition, the plate-like bodies disposed at both the left and right ends are disposed such that the bending angles of the L-shaped side view are substantially L-shaped on the left and right sides. In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-like body formed on the left side of the front view is set larger than the L-shaped bending angle of the plate-like body formed on the right side of the front view.

  Therefore, the drive part 7533d formed to be recessed on the other end side (left side in FIG. 74B) of the rotation member 7533 is formed at different positions in the vertical direction on the left and right. Further, the driving portion 7533d has a recessed width (the vertical width on the left side in FIG. 74 (b)) larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric accessory 520, and the inside of the driving portion 7533d. The protrusion 523 is formed to be slidable.

  Further, the width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532 b of the sliding member 532. Is set. Thereby, the rotating member 533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 facing each other.

  Further, in the front view, the rotation member 7533 is set such that the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two plate members).

  The rotating member 7533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes in the left and right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes in the left-and-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a side view that is substantially omitted. It is mainly provided with a drive portion 7533d formed to be recessed at the tip of the other end side of the L-shape.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 76, a driving mode of the first electric accessory 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described. 75A to 75C are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG. 76 (a) to 76 (c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric accessory 520. FIG.

  75 (a) and 76 (a) show the first state of the first electric combination 520, and FIGS. 75 (c) and 76 (c) show the second state of the first electric combination 520. 75 (b) and 76 (b) illustrate a state in which the first electric accessory 520 is positioned between the first state and the second state. 75 and 76 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are viewed transparently.

  75 (a) and 76 (a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the front side (FIG. 75 (a)). Left side) and the drive unit 7533d is positioned below. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state by the projection 523 being pushed downward.

  In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive unit 7533d and the upper side of the protrusion 523R (upper side in FIG. 75A) of the right wing member 520R. This is because the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R is switched from the rotation axis (through hole 521R) to the left side of the front view while the protrusion 523R is pushed down to a certain position by the driving unit 7533d and the right wing member 520R is in the first state. The right wing member 520R is formed by rotating to the first state by its own weight.

  In addition, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L (the lower side in FIG. 75 (a)) of the left wing member 520L.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 75 (b) and 76 (b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is pulled into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is on the rear side (FIG. 75 (b)). ) It is pulled in to the right side), and the drive unit 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

  In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive unit 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523L (the lower side in FIG. 75A) of the left wing member 520L. When the rotating member 533 is rotated (the driving unit 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left driving unit 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the clearance. Therefore, the start of the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the second state is accelerated.

  Next, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the main body 531a through the states shown in FIGS. 75B and 76B, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. Therefore, the drive unit 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the first electric accessory 520 is set to the second state shown in FIGS. 76 (c) and 76 (c).

  In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523R (the lower side of FIG. 75 (c)) of the right wing member 520R. This is because the center of gravity of the left wing member 520L is switched from the rotation axis (through hole 521L) to the left side of the front view while the protrusion 523L is pushed up to a certain position by the driving unit 7533d and the left wing member 520L is in the second state. It is formed by rotating the left wing member 520L to the first state by its own weight.

  Further, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive portion 7533d and the lower side of the protrusion 523R (the lower side in FIG. 75 (a)) of the right wing member 520R.

  Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L is displaced to the second state. It can be after the right wing member 520R.

  The displacement from the second state shown in FIGS. 75 (c) and 76 (c) to the first state shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 76 (c) is the displacement from the first state to the second state described above. Since it is only the opposite, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R is displaced to the first state. It can be ahead of the left wing member 520L.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, description will be given of a case where a game ball enters the winning slot unit 500 of the seventh embodiment. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  77 (a) and 77 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 in FIG. 24 (b). FIGS. 77A and 77B show a state where the first electric accessory 520 is being displaced from the second state to the first state.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is started first. The displacement of the right wing member 520R to the first state is made slower than that of the left wing member 520L.

  That is, a state where only the right wing member 520R of the first electric accessory 520 is opened can be instantaneously formed. At this time, when a game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is front side (lower side in FIG. 77 (a)) by the bulging portion 524R. Be guided to. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the game ball collide with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

  Since the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end portion on the front side, the game ball collided with the bulging portion 524L can be easily bounced back. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball entered from the right wing member 520R to enter the second winning opening 140.

  That is, in the seventh embodiment, when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the first state, the right wing member 520R opposite to the left wing member 520L on the side where the bulging portion 524L is formed on the front side is provided. By making the displacement after the left wing member 520L, it is possible to smoothly send the game ball that is entered during the displacement to the first state to the second winning port 140.

  In the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one wing member (one of the wing members 520L, 520R) of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is disposed at the position where the closed state is formed and the other wing member. Since the timing at which (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) is arranged at a position forming the closed state is different, it is difficult to sandwich the game ball between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R (side surfaces 526L and 526R). Accordingly, the facing distance between the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. Therefore, a space required for disposing the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be suppressed.

  Next, a rotating member 8533 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 82. In the first embodiment, the case where the second protrusion 532c for restricting the entry of the game ball is formed on the sliding member 532 has been described. However, in the eighth embodiment, the entry of the game ball to the rotating member 8533 is performed. A second protrusion 8533e to be regulated is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and the rotation thereof. It mainly includes a first case member 534 that disposes the member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 in a displaceable state inside, and a second case member 536 that is attached to the back side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

  The sliding member 8532 is formed in a substantially E shape when viewed from above, and includes a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction and two first protrusions protruding from the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a to the front side. The projection 532b is mainly provided with a third projection 532e that is located in the middle of the two first projections 532b and that projects from the front side.

  The sliding member 8532 is formed such that the dimension of the connecting portion 532 a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between the opposing sides in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral surface of the first case member 534. Thereby, the sliding member 8532 can be accommodated and arranged inside the first case member 534.

  The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533, which will be described later, and thereby can restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the second state. That is, the third protrusion 8532e is formed at the lower end surface above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric accessory 520 is in the first state.

  The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. The The clearance between the two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 8533 (between two plate-like bodies).

  In addition, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 8533 (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. The Thereby, the rotating member 8533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

  The rotating member 8533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes in the left and right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes in the left-and-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a side view that is substantially omitted. The driving portion 533d is formed to be recessed at the tip of the other end of the L-shape, and the second protrusion 8533e is provided to protrude from the center position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a to the front side. .

  The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending to the front side, and includes a standing wall 8533e1 that is bent and standing at the projecting tip. The standing wall 8533e1 is formed to be curved in a convex shape on the front side in a side view, and its curved axis is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

  Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. 79A and 79B are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. FIG. 80A and FIG. 80B are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. 81A and FIG. 81B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500.

  79 and 80, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent state. 79 (a), 80 (a) and 81 (a), the state in which the first electric combination 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 79 (b), 80 (b) and 81. In (b), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed to the front side (left side of FIG. 79 (a)). The driving unit 533d is positioned below. Accordingly, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state by the projection 523 being pushed downward.

  In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. In this case, a distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82A) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

  Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric accessory 520 is operated to be displaced to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

  In other words, a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is provided, and the transmission mechanism is opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) (see FIG. b) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 79 (a)), and a sliding member 8532 that is slid and displaced, and the sliding member 8532 is rotated to open by the slide displacement to the open slide position. The pair of wing members 520L and 520R are rotated to the position, and the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are at least closed by the sliding movement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed slide position. And the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed on the rotating member 8533, and the rotating member 8533 is in the open rotation position. When rotated, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed at the allowable position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed rotation position, the standing wall 8533e1 is disposed at the restricting position, and the sliding member 8532 is disposed at the closed sliding position. In the state where the rotation member 8533 is disposed at the closed rotation position, the rotation of the rotation member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by engaging the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. It is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally entered into the second prize opening.

  That is, from the state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed, for example, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotating member 8533 is directly operated, thereby the rotating member. Even if it is intended to rotate 8533 to the open position, the rotation of the rotary member 8533 to the open rotation position is restricted by the engagement of the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the standing wall 8533 e 1 is restricted. The position can be maintained (that is, it is possible to prevent the standing wall 8533e1 from being illegally forcedly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, the standing wall 8533e1 can restrict illegally entering the game ball into the entrance.

  Also, a third protrusion 8532e protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533), and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or rotating member 8533) so as to be engageable with the third protrusion 8532e. Since the third protrusion 8532e protrudes along the direction of slide displacement of the sliding member 8532, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 is used to engage the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a and the engagement thereof. It is possible to switch between disengagement and simplification of the structure.

  Note that the engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533) on which the third protrusion 8532e can abut, and a hole or a recess (in which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted). It may be a hole formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533 or a recessed portion provided in the recessed portion. That is, the third protrusion 8532e may be any member that can regulate the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position by contacting the connecting portion 533a. In this case, the connecting portion 533a is preferably a hole or a recess. As the third protrusion 8532e is inserted into the connecting portion 533a, the space necessary for disposing the third protrusion 8532e can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced, and the third protrusion 8532e is inserted into the connecting portion 533a. This is because the third protrusion 8532e can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 8532e from the outside can be made difficult.

  On the other hand, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is drawn to the back side (right side in FIG. 79 (b)), and the drive portion 533d is moved upward. Displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

  Further, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the back side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on the rotation of the rotation member 8533 is released. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 can be displaced by rotating the rotating member 8533.

  Therefore, the drive portion 533d of the rotation member 8533 rotates toward the closed rotation position and the open-side contact portion 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position. And the closed-side contact portion 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of wing members 520L and 520R when being operated, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside and rotated. Unauthorized access from outside to the member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 can be made difficult.

  That is, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing-side contact portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L and 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is moved to the open rotation position. Try to rotate toward. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement of the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the displacement of the wing member is applied to the closing side of the rotating member 8533. It can regulate by contact part 8533d2. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, and unauthorized access to the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

  In a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the rotating member 8533 is rotated, so that the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 is rotated from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1. The distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82 (b)) is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball entered into the second winning port 140 can be sent to the second case member 535 by rolling the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a case where the first electric accessory 520 is damaged will be described. 82A and 82B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 82 (a) and 82 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 14A shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 14B shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is in the second state. .

  As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the protrusions 534L and 534R of the first electric combination 520 are bent from the base end due to fraud or aging deterioration, and the first electric combination 520 becomes the first electric combination 520. When the state is changed to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, so that the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below. The Therefore, the standing wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

  Therefore, the arrangement of the standing walls 8533e1 is formed so as to be maintained at the restriction position in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside. It is possible to suppress the wall 8533e1 from being displaced to the allowable position. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict illegally entering the game ball into the second winning opening 140.

  That is, in a state where the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed or the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are opened from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated and the standing tip (gravity) of the standing wall 8533e1 is operated. The distance dimension L6 from the lower side in the direction (the lower end in FIG. 20B) to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b formed on the first case member 534 is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. . Therefore, even if the first electric accessory 520 is allowed to send a game ball to the second winning opening 140 by a player's fraudulent act, the gaming ball is inserted into the second winning opening 140 and rolls. This can be suppressed. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can collide with the standing wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532, and the rolling of the game ball can be stopped. As a result, when the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the second state (the game ball can be sent to the second winning port 140) by the player's fraudulent act, the gaming ball is illegally sent to the second winning port 140. It is easy to regulate entering the ball.

  In this case, the standing wall 8533e1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed continuously to the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. There is no need for a separate member that restricts illegal entry into the winning opening 140. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second protrusion are integrally formed with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532. Since it is formed, the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

  Next, a drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 87. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is restricted from moving the first electric accessory 520 when the movable body 531b protrudes from the main body portion 531a. In the ninth embodiment, the solenoid When the movable body 531b of 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is movable. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 according to the ninth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment includes a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, and the rotation thereof. It mainly includes a first case member 534 disposed in a state in which the member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 can be displaced inside, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534. It is formed.

  The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a substantially L shape in a side view with a predetermined width in the left-right direction and connecting the opposing ends on one end side by a connecting portion 533a. The The clearance between the two plate-like bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set larger than the diameter of the game ball. Accordingly, the game ball can be passed inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two plate-like bodies).

  Further, the width dimension in the left-right direction of the rotating member 9533 (the dimension between the opposing surfaces of the two plate-like bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing insides of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. The Accordingly, the rotation member 9533 can be disposed between the first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532 facing each other.

  The rotating member 9533 includes a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes in the left and right direction from a bent portion that is substantially L-shaped in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes in the left-and-right direction from one end of the substantially L-shaped side view, and a side view that is substantially omitted. A protruding portion 9533d that protrudes to the front side at the tip of the other end side of the L-shape and a second protrusion 8533e that protrudes to the front side from the central position in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 533a are mainly formed.

  The protruding portion 9533d is formed so as to protrude from the front end portion, and has a length that allows the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R to abut on the upper side (upper portion of FIG. 84 (a)). Is set to

  Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. 84 (a) and 84 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. FIG. FIG. 85A and FIG. 85B are front views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 530. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are cross-sectional views of the prize winning unit 500. FIG.

  84 and 85 show a state in which the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are viewed transparently. 84 (a), 85 (a), and 86 (a), the state where the first electric combination 520 is in the first state is shown in FIGS. 84 (b), 85 (b), and 86. In (b), the state in which the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state is illustrated. Further, FIG. 86A and FIG. 86B correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed to the front side (left side of FIG. 84 (a)). The projecting portion 9533f is positioned below. Accordingly, the first electric accessory 520 is brought into the first state by the projection 523 being pushed downward.

  In the ninth embodiment, an urging spring (not shown) is disposed on the rotation shaft of the first electric accessory 520, and the urging force of the urging spring causes the first electric accessory 520 to move to the first state side. A biasing force that is rotationally displaced is always applied. Thereby, when the 1st electrically-powered article 520 is displaced to a 2nd state by force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, shaking of a pachinko machine), it can suppress staying in a 2nd state.

  On the other hand, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is drawn into the main body portion 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is drawn to the back side (right side in FIG. 79 (b)), and the protruding portion 9533f is upward. Is displaced. As a result, the first electric accessory 520 is in the second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

  In this case, the first electric combination 520 can be maintained in the second state by the protrusion portion 9533f and the protrusions 523L and 523R of the first electric combination 520 always contacting each other.

  Further, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a from the second state, and the projecting portion 9533f is displaced downward, so that the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring. Displaced to 1 state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a description will be given of a case where the first electric accessory 520 is illegally operated. 87A and 87B are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 87 (a) and 87 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 87 (a) shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is in the first state, and FIG. 87 (b) shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is in the second state. .

  As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), with the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protruding from the main body portion 531a, the first electric accessory 520 is operated by an illegal act of the player. When the first state is changed to the second state, only the first electric accessory 520 is rotationally displaced.

  Therefore, since the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned below, the standing ball 8533e1 causes the game ball to roll on the upper end surface of the standing part 534b, and thereby the second case member. It is possible to suppress the ball being sent to 535.

  In this case (in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is projected from the main body portion 531a), the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 as described above. . Therefore, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress operating the standing wall 8533e1 from the player side. As a result, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the store side due to the illegal act of the player.

  In the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that suppresses the displacement of the second protrusion are integrally formed with the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532. Since it is formed, the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in 9th Embodiment, it can suppress that the 1st electrically-powered article 520 is destroyed by the player's fraudulent act. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss on the store side due to the player's fraud.

  That is, in the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring that biases the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction is provided, and the rotating member 9533 is rotated when it is rotated toward the open rotation position. The protrusion portion 9533f that abuts against the 520R is provided, and when the rotary member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are closed by the urging force of the urging spring. When the wing members 520L and 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are not brought into contact with the rotating member 9533, and an external force due to the forcible opening is prevented from acting on the rotating member 9533. it can. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, as an urging unit that constantly applies an urging force that is rotationally displaced toward the first state to the first electric accessory 520, a spring (torsion) that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force. In addition to a spring and a coil spring, a magnet that urges the pair of wing members 520L and 520R in the closing direction by an attractive force is exemplified.

  Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is nonlinearly decreased (or increased) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 670. However, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 10678 is displaced. As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 (a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 88 (b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 10670.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment includes an extending member 671, an extending member 10671 disposed to face the extending member 671, and the extending member 10671. And the decoration unit 672 connected with the extending member 671 and the rotating member 10678 arrange | positioned in the state which can be rotated on the extending member are mainly provided, and it is formed.

  The extending member 10671 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and protrudes outward in the left and right directions at a longitudinal end at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. The connecting projection 671b is formed mainly, and the rotary shaft 10671e is formed to protrude in a columnar shape toward the shaft support hole 671a from the connecting projection 671b.

  The rotating member 10678 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is disposed on the extending member 10671 so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 10678 intersects the longitudinal direction of the extending side of the extending member 10671 substantially at right angles.

  The rotation member 10678 includes a shaft support hole 10678a penetrating in the left-right direction, a through hole 10678b formed in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extending member 10671 on one end side in the longitudinal direction, and the other end side in the longitudinal direction. And an inclined surface 10678c formed by cutting out the side surface of the main surface.

  The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extending member 10671 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, the rotating member 10678 can be rotatably arranged on the extending member 10671 by inserting the rotating shaft 10671e into the shaft support hole 10777a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e.

  The through hole 10678b is a hole into which the torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2.

  Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. 91 (a) and 91 (b) are partially enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in the range XCI of FIG.

  Note that FIG. 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 91 (a) and 91 (b) illustrate a state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced, and FIG. 91 (b) illustrates a state where the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are in contact with each other. A cross section of is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L according to the tenth embodiment, a displacement member 670 is disposed on the upper side and a displacement member 10670 is disposed on the lower side, and the shafts of the displacement members 670 and 10670 are disposed. The axis of the support hole 671a is coaxially arranged. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of displacement members 670 arranged in the upside down direction and the lower displacement member 670 of the displacement members 670 are changed to the displacement member 10670. The driving means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decoration units 672 of the displacement members 670 and 10670 disposed up and down are displaced in a direction approaching each other, the extending members 671 and 10671 are brought close to each other.

  In the state where the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the inclined surface 10678 c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side surface of the extending member 671. Thus, the rotating member 10678 is rotated about the shaft support hole 10678a so that the inclined surface 10678c is substantially parallel to the side surface of the extending member 671 (in FIG. 91 (b), the rotating member 10678 is supported by the shaft). It is rotated counterclockwise about the hole 10678a).

  Accordingly, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side across the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same manner. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position where the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

  In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side of the torsion spring SP2 to the base end side. Therefore, the urging force that acts on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2 can be increased.

  Therefore, when the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced while the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 can be suppressed.

  Further, the extending member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is disposed is a driven side (side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 for driving the displacement member 10670, and thus is driven from the driving motor KM3. When the transmission of force is reduced as compared with the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large-diameter gear 683), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is increased by the displacement of the rotating member 10678 to drive the driving force. Can compensate for the lack of power. As a result, it is possible to suppress the contact between the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 from being separated.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted from the left and right sides of the displacement member 670 has been described. However, in the eleventh embodiment, the driving force is transmitted from only one side of the displacement member 11670. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  92 to 94, U is given to the end of the reference numerals of the displacement member 670 disposed on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means for driving the displacement member 670, as in FIGS. In addition, a description will be given by adding the symbol D to the end of the symbol of the displacement member 670 and the driving means for driving the displacement member 670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L.

  The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94 are schematic views of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. 92 to 94, the transition state of the displacement member 11670 is illustrated in order.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed only on one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extending members 671 arranged symmetrically with respect to the displacement member 670 are arranged, and in the eleventh embodiment, the extending members 671 are arranged on only one of them. The

  In the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is formed only on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), and the extending member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 disposed in a pair of upper and lower in the vertical displacement unit 11600L is disposed upside down.

  As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically displaceable member 11670 is displaced, the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center position of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

  As shown in FIG. 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state of FIG. 93, it is possible to displace in the vertical direction with the side surfaces of the decoration units 672 in contact with each other.

  In the case of the eleventh embodiment, since the extending member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, the driving of the decoration unit 672 on the opposite side to the driving side is slow, and there is a possibility that a gap is formed between the two decoration units 672 However, since the extending member 671 is arranged on the opposite side in the vertical direction, the end on the opposite side to the driving side of one decoration unit 672 is pushed by the end on the driving side of the other decoration unit 672. be able to. As a result, the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672 can be suppressed.

  In this case, it is preferable to delay the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672. By delaying the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

  More specifically, the decorative unit in which the driving side end of the decorative unit 672 driven earlier is driven later by increasing the drive timing of the displacement member 11670 on the side opposite to the displacement direction of the decorative unit 672. The end of 672 opposite the drive side can be pushed out. On the other hand, the end of the decoration unit 672 that has been driven first is in contact with the end of the decoration unit 672 that is driven later with a stronger force. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced in a state where the side surfaces of the decoration unit 672 are in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress a gap from being formed between the two decoration units 672.

  Further, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is on one side, so that the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) can be easily deformed. Therefore, the driving force of the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decoration unit 672 is advanced, whereby the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671) is deformed and the elastic force when the displacement returns. Can be used to suppress the formation of a gap between the two decoration units 672.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a winning opening unit 500 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the thicknesses of the front base 511 and the back base 512 of the winning opening unit 500 are formed to be substantially constant has been described. However, in the eleventh embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the back base 512 is Partially changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 95A is a top view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 95B is a cross-sectional view of the winning a prize opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. In FIG. 95 (a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent, and in FIG. 95 (b), the front base 511 is shown as being opaque. In FIG. 95 (b), the rolling direction of the game ball that rolls on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by a two-dot chain line together with the phantom line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed such that the thickness in the front-rear direction (FIG. 95 (b) vertical direction) is partially different on the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, a front-side bulging portion 12511f that bulges to the back side in the upper right portion of the second winning opening 140 is provided.

  Further, the back base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-rear direction (FIG. 95 (b) vertical direction) is partially different on the left and right with the second winning opening 140 interposed therebetween. That is, a rear side bulging portion 12512d that bulges to the rear side at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140 is provided.

  The front side bulging portion 12511f and the back side bulging portion 12512d are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. Thereby, it is suppressed that a pair of wing member 520L, 520R collides with the front side bulging part 12511f and the back side bulging part 12512d.

  In addition, the front-side bulged portion 12511f and the back-side bulged portion 12512d have their end portions in the left-right direction (FIG. Direction) located outside. Thereby, the game ball that flows down from the upstream side of the first electric accessory 520 and is likely to be sent to the side surfaces 526L and 526R is surely collided with the front-side expanded portion 12511f and the back-side expanded portion 12512d. Can do.

  The front-side bulged portion 12511f is formed on a side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulged portion 524R of the right wing member 520R. In other words, the front-side bulged portion 12511f is formed on the side surface in the front-rear direction opposite to the position where the bulged portion 524R is formed in the front-rear direction.

  On the other hand, the back side bulging portion 12512d is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L. In other words, the back-side bulged portion 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-rear direction opposite to the formation position of the bulged portion 524L in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down on the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the front side bulging portion 12511f and guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be moved toward the back side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R can be easily caused to collide with the bulging portion 524R.

  On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the rear side bulging portion 12512d and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can be easily caused to collide with the bulging portion 524L.

  Therefore, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, so that the game balls can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140 and to prevent clogging of the balls.

  When a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) Such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface in one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

  Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the pitching speed can be slowed by causing the game balls sent to the wing members 520L and 520R to collide with the front-side expanded portion 12511f and the back-side expanded portion 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the impact when colliding with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, and it is possible to suppress the wing members 520L and 520R from being damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a winning opening unit 500 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The winning opening unit 500 according to the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion that protrudes between the front base 511 and the back base 512 according to the first embodiment. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 96A is a top view of the winning opening unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 96B is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along the line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. In FIG. 96 (a), the front base 511 is illustrated as being transparent, and in FIG. 96 (b), the front base 511 is illustrated as being opaque. In FIG. 96 (b), as in FIG. 24 (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L and 526R is indicated by a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511 g that protrudes toward the back base 512 on the left side of the second winning opening 140. Further, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e that protrudes toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

  The protrusion 13511g and the protrusion 13512e are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L and 520R. Thereby, it is suppressed that a pair of wing member 520L, 520R collides with protrusion 13511g and protrusion 13512e.

  The protrusion 13511g is formed on the side surface on the same side as the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R. On the other hand, the protrusion 13512e is formed on the side surface facing the formation position in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

  Thereby, the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 can be collided with the protrusion 13511g and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the right upper side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be brought close to the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524R when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526R. As a result, the wing member 520R can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the game ball sent from the right side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526R of the wing member 520R is sent to the side surface 526R without colliding with the protrusion 13511g formed above the wing member 520R. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulging portion 524R when rolling the side surface 526R.

  On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 can collide with the protrusion 13512e and be guided to the back side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be moved toward the back side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric accessory 520 is sent to the side surface 526L, it can be difficult to collide with the bulging portion 524L. As a result, the wing member 520L can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, the game ball sent from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 to the side surface 526L of the wing member 520L is sent to the side surface 526L without colliding with the protrusion 13512e formed above the wing member 520L. . The game ball in this case can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulging portion 524L when rolling the side surface 526L.

  Therefore, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surfaces (side surfaces 526L and 526R) are brought into contact with the bulging portions 524L and 524R, so that the game balls can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the second winning opening 140 and to prevent clogging of the balls.

  When a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one wing member (one of the wing members 520L and 520R) reaches the guide surface of one wing member (the other of the wing members 520L and 520R) Such a game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other wing member. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface in one wing member (one of wing members 520L and 520R) passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

  Furthermore, since the number of game balls that collide with the bulging portions 524L and 524R of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by the protrusions 13511g and the protrusions 13512e, the durability of the wing members 520L and 520R can be improved.

  Next, the wing members 14520L and 14520R (first variable device 14520) of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The wing members 14520L and 14520R of the fourteenth embodiment are formed with different width dimensions in the front-rear direction of the bulging portions 524L and 524R. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 97 (b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. 98 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500, and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L along the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98 (a). ) Is a schematic cross-sectional view of right wing member 520R taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in FIG. 98 (b).

  In FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the perspective direction in the left-right direction is shown in the opposite direction. Further, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 98 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 98 (a), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. 24 (b). Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The left wing member 14520L has a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the gravitational direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, and a back surface from the vicinity of the through hole 521L. A projection 523L projecting on the side, a recess 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through-hole 521L on the end surface on the through-hole 521L side, and side surfaces of the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state 14526L and a bulging portion 14524L formed to project from the side surface 14526L are mainly provided.

  The side surface 14526L includes an inclined surface 14526L1 that is formed to be inclined upward from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526L2 that is formed on the front side from a substantially central position in the front-rear direction.

  The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back surface side (left side in FIG. 98 (b)) toward the smooth surface 14526L2 side. Accordingly, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256L, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452L2 side by the downward inclination.

  Further, the bulging portion 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (FIG. 98B, the back side of the paper surface). The bulging portion 14524L is formed so that the width dimension in the front-rear direction is smaller than half of the width in the front-rear direction of the wing member 14520L. That is, the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 15254L is made smaller than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L.

  As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 is rolled to the smooth surface 14526L2 side, so that the game rolling on the side surface 14526L. The probability that the sphere collides with the bulging portion 14524L can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction. The right wing member 14520R includes a through-hole 521R penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the direction of gravity, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through-hole 521R, and a rear side from the vicinity of the through-hole 521R. A projection 523R projecting on the side, a recessed portion 525R recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface on the through hole 521R side, and a side surface 14526R of the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R in the closed state And a bulging portion 14524R formed to project from the side surface 14526R.

  The side surface 14526R includes an inclined surface 14526R1 formed to be inclined upward from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction toward the back side, and a smooth surface 14526R2 formed on the front side from the substantially central position in the front-rear direction.

  The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed to be inclined downward from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 98 (c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2 side. Thereby, among the game balls sent to the side surface 14256R, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided to the smooth surface 1452R2 side by the downward inclination.

  Further, the bulging portion 14524R is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526R1 (FIG. 98B, the back side of the paper surface). The bulging portion 14524L is formed so that the width dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than half of the width in the front-rear direction of the wing member 14520L. That is, the front-rear direction width of the inclined surface 14526R1 is made larger than the front-rear direction width of the bulging portion 14524L. Therefore, the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524R of the right wing member 14520R is formed larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L.

  As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 is rolled to the smooth surface 14526R2 side, so that the game rolling on the side surface 14526R. The probability that the sphere collides with the bulging portion 14524R can be reduced.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment is formed in such a form that a game ball flows down from the left side of the first electric accessory 520 and is easily sent to the side surfaces 526L and 526R of the open wing members 520L and 520R. The More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10, the first through gate 66 that opens the pair of wing members 520L and 520R is disposed on the left side of the center frame 86, and the game ball is placed on the center frame 86 during time reduction or probability change. It is configured to be launched toward the left side. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the game board 13 flow down the entire left side of the game board 13 and are sent to the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (the pair of wing members 14520L and 14520R). It becomes easy.

  Therefore, compared to the right wing member 14520R, more game balls are sent to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the wear of the bulging portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L is accelerated, and the left wing member 14520L is easily broken. There was a point.

  On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment, inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L and 14526R, and the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are formed on the inclined surfaces 14526L1 and 14526R1, and the side where many game balls are sent. Since the bulging portions 14524L and 14524R are made small in the front-rear direction, the wear of the bulging portion 14524L is reduced by reducing the probability that the game ball collides with the bulging portion 14524L of the wing member 14520L on the side where many balls are fed. It can suppress being done early. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wing members 14520L and 14520R on the side where a lot of game balls are sent from being easily broken.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, a variable winning device 15065 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the bulging portions 524L and 524R are formed in the pair of wing members 520L and 520R has been described, but in the fifteenth embodiment, the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c are formed in the variable winning device 65. Is done. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  99 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. FIG. 100 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and FIG. 100 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100 (a).

  99 (a) and 100 (a) correspond to the partially enlarged view of FIG. 99 shows the closed state of the variable prize apparatus 15065, and FIG. 100 shows the open state of the variable prize apparatus 15065. Also, in FIG. 100 (b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a is illustrated by a two-dot chain line together with the reference number of the virtual line KS1 as in FIG. Further, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is illustrated by an arrow F, and the back direction is illustrated by an arrow B.

  Further, the closed state of the variable prize device 15065 means that the plane of the variable prize device 15065 formed in a plate state is positioned substantially parallel to the plane on the front side of the game board 13 and the game ball flowing down the game area has a specific prize. This is a state in which it is impossible to enter the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 means that the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the plane on the front side of the game board 13 and the game ball flowing down the game area is a specific winning port (large open port). ) 65a is a state where it is possible to enter the ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the variable winning device 15065 is formed in a plate-like body that is long to the left and right, and is disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the game board 13 around one end on the back side. The variable winning device 15065 is connected to a driving device (not shown) on the back side, and the driving force is applied to the driving device so that the variable winning device 15065 is displaced between the closed position and the open position. It is possible.

  Further, the variable winning device 15065 has two bulging portions 15065b and 15065c projectingly formed on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side in the open state. Further, the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to be inclined downward from the left and right sides toward the center. Thereby, the game ball sent to the side surface 15065a can roll toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  The bulging portion 15065b is located on the left side of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a as viewed from the front, and is connected to the front end face in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 100 (b)). The bulging portion 15065c is positioned on the right side of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a as viewed from the front, and is connected to the rear end face in the alveolar state (the state shown in FIG. 100B).

  That is, the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c are formed on both the left and right sides with the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a interposed therebetween, and are formed at different positions in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when a game ball is sent to the left and right sides of the open variable winning device 15065, the game ball can be prevented from colliding in front of the specific winning port (large opening) 65a and bounced back to the left and right sides. .

  More specifically, a game ball sent to the left side of the front side of the side surface 15065a collides with the bulging portion 15065b and is guided to the back side when it rolls to the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a side. The On the other hand, when the game ball is sent to the right side of the side 15065a as viewed from the front, when it rolls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, it collides with the bulging portion 15065c and is guided to the front.

  Therefore, the front-rear direction position of the game ball sent from the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a can be displaced by the bulging portion 15065b and the bulging portion 15065c. Therefore, when the game balls are sent to the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a and the left and right game balls collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the rebound (repulsion) direction can be set to the front-rear direction. it can. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the game ball into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  Further, when a game ball is sent from one of the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a, the game ball collides with one of the bulging portion 15065b or the bulging portion 15065c to displace the position in the front-rear direction. When the front side is rolled in the left-right direction, the game ball can collide with the other of the bulging portion 15065b or the bulging portion 15065c. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the game ball sent from one side of the side surface 15065a rolls ahead of the specific winning opening (large opening port) 65a and escapes to the other side of the side surface 15065a.

  The side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to have a width equal to or greater than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and a pair of bulging portions. 15065b and 15065c are arranged at positions sandwiching the entrance in front view, and are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). Therefore, by bringing the game ball guided (rolled) on the side surface 15065a into contact with the bulging portions 15065b and 15065c, the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  Also, one bulging portion 15065b, 15065c and the other bulging portion 15065b, 15065c are positioned in a direction orthogonal to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a). By arranging them differently, when a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable prize-winning device 15065 from one side in the width direction (or the other side), the game ball is placed in either of the pair of bulging portions 15065b and 15065c. Either one can be brought into contact. Accordingly, a game ball that has entered the side surface 15065a of the variable prize device 15065 from one side in the width direction (or the other side) passes through the side surface 15065a of the variable prize device 15065 and flows out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable prize device 15065. Can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the engagement of the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, the rotation member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged by the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a and the third protrusion 8532e coming into contact with each other. This is done by inserting the third protrusion 16532e into the recess of the portion 533a. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 (a) is a front view of the first electric combination 520 and the drive unit 8530 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 101 (b) is the first electric combination along the line CIb-CIb in FIG. 101 (a). 520 is a cross-sectional view of the drive unit 8530, and FIG. 101C is a cross-sectional view of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 8530 along the CIc-CIc line of FIG. 101B.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the sixteenth embodiment is formed with a recessed portion 16533a1 that is recessed from the back side to the front side at a substantially central position in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the back.

  Further, the third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to project at a position facing the above-described recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-rear direction. The front view shape of the third protrusion 16532e is formed in a horizontally long rectangle that is slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and the tip is formed in a tapered shape.

  Thus, when the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are in the closed state, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

  Further, in this case, since the engaging portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the space required for disposing the third protrusion 16532e is suppressed by the amount of insertion of the third protrusion 16532e into the recessed portion 16533a1, thereby reducing the size. In addition, the third protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside by being inserted through the recessed portion 16533a1, and unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside can be made difficult.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, the sliding member 15732 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the standing wall 532c1 is positioned upstream of the sensor device SE1 disposed on the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 140 has been described. In the seventeenth embodiment, a case where the standing wall 17532c1 is arranged on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103. 102 (a) and 102 (b) are side views of the first electric accessory 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the seventeenth embodiment. 103 (a) and 103 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG.

  In FIG. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown in a transparent manner. 102 (a) and 103 (a), the first electric combination 520 is in a closed state, and in FIGS. 102 (b) and 102 (b), the first electric combination 520 is in an open state. Each of these states is illustrated. Further, FIGS. 102A and 102B correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 17A and 17B, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment has a standing wall 17532c1 protruding from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side of FIG. 102 (a)). The standing wall 17532c1 is provided with a standing wall 17532c1 formed such that the tip thereof is set at a position exceeding the lower end surface of the second case member 535 and the tip is bent to the front side.

  The standing length of the standing wall 17532c1 on the front side is such that when the first electric accessory 520 is in a closed state, the upper and lower side surfaces are below the sensor device SE1 disposed on the second case member 535. Set to the length to be located.

  In addition, the second case member 535 is formed with an opening 17535b that is formed by penetrating in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103A). The second protrusion 17532c is disposed in a state of being inserted inside the opening 17535b.

  Further, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the slide width of the sliding member 17532 that slides and displaces in the front-rear direction (drive width of the solenoid 531). Thereby, the sliding member 17532 can be slid in the front-rear direction in a state where the second protrusion 17532c is inserted inside the opening 17535b.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is closed, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1, and the game The insertion of the sphere can be restricted. On the other hand, when the first electric accessory 520 is opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is disposed on the back side of the opening of the sensor device SE1 (a hole for detecting the passage of the game ball). Thereby, when the 1st electrically-driven accessory 520 is made into an open state, a game ball can be penetrated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric combination is forcibly set to the second state due to the player's fraud. 104 (a) and 104 (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning opening unit 500. FIG. 104 (a) and 104 (b) correspond to the cross sections of FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), respectively. FIG. 104 (a) shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is closed, and FIG. 104 (b) shows a state where the first electric combination 520 is opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b), when the first electric accessory 520 is in the closed state, the pair of wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened due to the illegal act of the player. When the first electric accessory 520 is in the open state, the front-rear direction position of the sliding member 17532 is set to the same position as in the closed state, as in the first embodiment.

  Accordingly, when the first electric accessory 520 is forcibly opened, the standing wall 17532c1 is disposed on the downstream side of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball into which the game ball has entered from the second winning port 140 is stagnated on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1.

  In this case, the separation distance from the sensor device SE1 to the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that substantially matches the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball fastened on the upper surface of the standing wall 17532c1 is in a state that is always detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, when the sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric accessory 520 is illegally opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from cheating and to notify the store operator of the cheating by the player.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a sensor device SE1 that detects a game ball that has entered the second winning port 140, and the standing wall 17532c1 has a restricted position downstream of the sensor device SE1. In addition, since the game ball is restricted at a position where the sensor device SE1 can detect, for example, when the wing members 520L and 520R are forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flowed from the entrance, the sensor device The state in which SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether the detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued beyond a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally introduced.

  Next, the rotating member 18812 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, the case where the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a certain distance from the axis of the hub 812a in the radial direction has been described. However, in the eighteenth embodiment, the protrusion 18812a1 is the hub. It is formed at a different distance from the axis of 812a in the radial direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  105 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 105 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along the line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided with a projection 18812a1 projecting in a hemispherical shape toward the edge 824 side (see FIG. 35) of the outer reel unit 820 arranged to face the hub 812a. Provide multiple.

  The protrusions 18812a1 are formed with different radial distances from the adjacent protrusions 18812a and the hub 812a. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, the air flow generated by the first (a tip positioned on the rotation side) projection 18812a1 is transferred to the second projection 18812a1 (the rotation rear side of the previous projection 18812a1). It can be made to collide easily. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, airflow can be easily generated. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 so as to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  Next, the relationship among the accommodation unit 880, the inner reel unit 810, and the outer reel unit 820 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the side wall portion 881 of the housing unit 880 has been described as being formed in a plate-like body. However, the side wall portion 881 in the nineteenth embodiment has a plurality of openings. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  106 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative symbol display device 800 in the nineteenth embodiment. 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a state where the outer reel unit 820 is changed (rotated and displaced). In FIG. 106 (b), an opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is indicated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), a plurality of openings 19881d penetrating in the left-right direction are formed in the side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30 (a)) arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 800 when viewed from the front. Is done.

  The openings 19881d are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction around the rotation axes of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The formation angles of the adjacent openings 19881d are set to be substantially the same as the formation angles of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. Moreover, the opening dimension in the circumferential direction of the opening 19881d is set smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the spoke 812c and the spoke 822. Thus, as shown in FIG. 106A, the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) is rotated to a predetermined position, so that the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) can be arranged next to the opening 19881d. it can. That is, the opening 19881d can be covered with the spoke 822 (or the spoke 812c) in a side view.

  Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated, air can be prevented from flowing in from the opening 19812c.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) are arranged at circumferential positions different from the opening 19881d. be able to.

  Thereby, when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotated, air can be allowed to flow from the opening 19812c. In other words, by making the air inflow path the shortest and reducing the air resistance, the air can easily flow into the decorative symbol display device 800 (accommodating unit 880).

  Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated so that the player can visually recognize other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811, the inflow of air from the opening 19881 d is restricted to control the inner reel 811. The display can be easily seen by the player. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d is allowed and the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 are cleaned. It can be done easily.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right pair of wing members 520L and 520R other than the bulging portions 524L and 524R is formed symmetrically has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protrusions 523L and 523R of the wing members 520L and 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side so that the wing members 520L and 520R have the same shape. In this case, since the wing members 520L and 520R can be formed of the same parts, the manufacturing cost of the wing members 520L and 520R can be reduced by making the parts common.

  Although the case where the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on a smooth surface has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curvedly formed in a convex state toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed and can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the light transmission part 621a can be made uniform.

  In the first and eleventh implementations, the case where the number of components arranged is different has been described as an aspect in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member) are different in the configured rigidity (dimensions, material, etc. of the constituent members), and the driving force (size, size) transmitted between the one side and the other side Transmission time, transmission timing, etc.), one side and the other side have different connection states (for example, the number of connection parts, amount of rattling of the connection parts, etc.), one side and the other side It is also possible to use a combination of these, which is different in ease of displacement to the other party (such as an urging force received from the urging means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.).

  As a result, when the supporting state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D have their own higher rigidity side (lower side) the other lower rigidity side (higher side). Can be met. Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D pushes (moves forward) the other party on the high rigidity side, and the low rigidity side Then you can create a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent. As a result, the opposing sides of the decoration unit 672U and the decoration unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and a gap can be prevented from being formed between the opposing sides.

  In the ninth embodiment, the case where the first electric accessory 520 is displaced to the closed state by the urging spring has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by disposing a magnetic body inside the first electric combination 520 and arranging a magnet on the front base 511 or the back base 512, the first electric combination 520 is displaced to a closed state by the magnetic force of the magnet. It may be made to do.

  In the first and eleventh embodiments, the case where the number of components arranged is different has been described as an aspect in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as an aspect in which the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) are configured to be different from each other, the rigidity of the component members (the size and number of components) , Materials and the like), components having different connection states (for example, the number of connected portions, the amount of rattling of the connected portions, etc.), and combinations thereof may be used. Due to the difference in configuration, the magnitude and timing of the driving force to be transmitted are different, and the support modes of the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D are biased to one side.

  Although the case where the standing wall 532c1 is formed so as to be slidable inside the first case member 534 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a state where the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 531a, the standing wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140, even if the wing members 520L and 520R are opened by fraud, the inside of the second winning opening 140 (standing It is possible to prevent the game ball from staying in front of the wall 532c1. As a result, the player can be prevented from cheating.

  In the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the case has been described in which the game ball is guided in the front-rear direction by changing the shape of the side surface between the front base 511 and the back base 512, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. .

  For example, magnets may be arranged inside the front base 511 and the back base 512, and the game balls may be guided in the front-rear direction by the attractive force of the magnets. Thereby, since it is not necessary to narrow the space between the front base 511 and the back base 512, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being sandwiched between the front base 511 and the back base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the attracting force of the magnet be an attracting force that does not hold the game ball on the attracting surface of the magnet. Thereby, it can suppress that the game ball is made into the state attracted | sucked by the side surface of the front base 511 and the back surface base 512. FIG.

  In the second and eighteenth embodiments, the case where the plurality of protrusions 2812a1 and 18812a1 are formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface facing the edge 824 of the hub 812a. Also in this case, the airflow can be generated by the concave and convex shape of the groove as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, air can be sent between the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 so as to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be capable of rotational displacement with respect to the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the variable winning device 15065 is disposed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is immersed in the game board 13, and a game ball is placed in the specific prize opening 65 a. In the open state, the variable winning device 15065 may be projected to the front side of the game board 13 so that the game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball in the entrance and formed to be displaceable, the guide member is A pair of projecting portions projecting from the guide surface so as to be able to contact a game ball rolling on the guide surface, the pair of projecting portions being arranged along the guide surface. A gaming machine A1 that is arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the guided direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a entrance opening in which a game ball can be entered, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the game ball at the entrance and formed to be displaceable. ing. Examples of the guide member include a pair of wing members that have a guide surface that guides the game ball to the entrance and that are disposed across the entrance and are rotatably supported on the base end side. In this case, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-164598 discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire guide surface of one wing member and a second groove is provided on the entire guide surface of the other wing member. Disclosed. According to this technique, the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, so that the game ball simultaneously guides (rolls) the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member. Even when the game balls are moved, they can be biased in different directions (one on the glass plate side and the other on the game board side). Therefore, each of these game balls can smoothly enter the entrance. However, the above-described conventional technique has a problem that the game ball cannot be sufficiently biased. In addition, a game ball entering from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and pass from the other side of the guide member. In this case, the game ball is not entered into the entrance, so the player's There was a problem that interest was impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the guide member is provided with a pair of projecting portions formed so as to be able to contact a game ball that projects from the guide surface and rolls on the guide surface. Since the installation part is arranged at a position different from the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projection part. By doing so, such a game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

  In addition, the pair of projecting portions are arranged at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, thereby projecting the game ball entering from one side of the guide member. Can be brought into contact with the portion. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached from one side of the guide member passes through the guide member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members that are disposed with the entrance opening interposed therebetween, and the base end side of the guide member is rotatably supported, and the pair of wing members approach or separate from the distal end side. By rotating in the direction of rotation, a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass or an open state in which the game ball can pass is formed, and the pair of projecting portions project from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members. A direction in which the protruding portion of one wing member of the pair of wing members and the protruding portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface A gaming machine A2 that is arranged at different positions.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members that are disposed with the ball entrance interposed therebetween and rotatably supported on the base end side. The projecting portion projects from the respective guide surfaces of the pair of wing members, and the projecting portion of one wing member and the projecting portion of the other wing member of the pair of wing members extend along the guide surface. Since the game balls are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls are guided, the game balls guided (rolled) on the guide surface are brought into contact with the projecting portions, so that the game balls can be reliably secured. Can be biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance and to prevent clogging.

  Further, the protruding portion of one wing member and the protruding portion of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member). When the game ball that has entered the guide surface in one wing member reaches the guide surface in the other wing member, the game ball is placed in the other wing member. It can be brought into contact with the protruding portion. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface in one wing member passes through the guide surface in the other wing member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the protruding portion protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the tip end side of the wing member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A2, the projecting portion is projected from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side than the distal end side of the wing member, and thus is guided to the guide surface. It is possible to secure an area where the game ball can roll until it comes into contact with the protruding portion. Therefore, the fall of the rolling speed of the game ball can be suppressed correspondingly, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the entrance.

  Further, since the projecting portion projects from the projecting surface at a position closer to the base end side than the distal end side of the wing member, the path of the game ball biased in contact with the projecting portion becomes the entrance port. It is possible to suppress the return to the path before the deviation before reaching (the end of the guide surface). That is, it is possible to easily send the game ball from the guide surface to the entrance in the biased state.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, a first area that continues from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member is formed on the guide surface, and is not in contact with the game ball guided through the first area. The protruding portion is formed with a size, and the first region of the guide surface in one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface in the other wing member are A gaming machine A4, wherein the gaming machine A4 is arranged at a different position along a guide surface in a direction orthogonal to a direction in which a game ball is guided.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, the guide surface is formed with a first area continuous from the distal end side to the proximal end side of the wing member, and the gaming ball guided through the first area is not Since the projecting portion is formed with a size that makes contact, when the game ball that has entered the guide surface rolls in the first area, it can be avoided that the rolling speed of the game ball decreases, You can smoothly enter the entrance.

  In this case, the first region of the guide surface of one wing member of the pair of wing members and the first region of the guide surface of the other wing member are orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface. When the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) through the first area of the guide surface of one wing member and the first area of the guide surface of the other wing member However, these game balls can be biased in different directions from each other, and can smoothly enter the entrance.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member that rotatably supports the wing member is provided, and the base member includes a regulating portion that contacts the wing member and regulates the rotation of the wing member, A gaming machine A5, wherein the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the gaming machine A5 includes a base member that pivotally supports the wing member, and the base member abuts on the wing member to regulate the rotation of the wing member. Since the restricting portion is provided and the protruding portion of the wing member is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. That is, since the projecting portion is a portion projecting from the wing member (guide surface), the portion where the rigidity of the wing member is relatively high can be used as a stopper to contact the regulating portion of the base member. Accordingly, breakage of the wing member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with a side surface on the base end side of the wing member, and is substantially flush with a side surface on the base end side of the wing member in the closed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that a side surface of the projecting portion to be formed is in contact with at least a regulating portion of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the projecting portion has a side surface formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base end side of the wing member, and in the closed state, the base end side of the wing member Since the side surface of the projecting portion formed substantially flush with the side surface of the base member is in contact with at least the regulating portion of the base member, a portion (side surface of the projecting portion) that is far from the rotating shaft is placed on the regulating portion of the base member. The reaction force input from the restricting portion to the wing member can be reduced by the amount that can be brought into contact with the wing member. Therefore, damage to the wing member can be suppressed. Further, for example, compared with the case where the projecting tip surface of the projecting portion is brought into contact with the restricting portion of the base member, the restricting portion of the base member can be separated from the entrance port, and the flow to the entrance port can be reduced. Space for roads can be secured. In addition to the side surface of the projecting portion, the base end side surface of the wing member may be brought into contact with the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced and damage to the wing member can be further suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, in the closed state, provided with an interposition wall located between the opposing protruding portions, the pair of wing members are configured so that the protruding portions are not formed when viewed in the rotation axis direction. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the area to be played is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the facing distance between the projecting portions is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  Here, the pair of wing members are arranged at positions where the facing distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is larger than the diameter of the game ball so as not to sandwich the game ball. In this case, when the protruding portion is protruded from the guide surface, the pair of wing members are further spaced apart by the protruding height of the protruding portion so that the game ball is not sandwiched between the protruding portions. A necessity arises and the space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing | blade member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the gaming machine A7 includes an interposition wall positioned between the opposing protruding portions in the closed state. In the direction view, the opposing distance of the guide surface in the region where the protruding portion is not formed is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing interval of the protruding portion is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, Space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

  That is, even when the pair of wing members start to close (even when the transition to the closed state starts) in a state where the game ball is guided (rolled) on the guide surface, there is an intervening wall between the opposing protruding portions. By being positioned, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being discharged between the facing portions of the projecting portion and the game ball being sandwiched between the projecting portions. A game ball discharged from between the facing portions of the projecting portion by the interposition wall is positioned between the opposing guide surfaces in the region where the projecting portion is not formed. Since it is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball is never caught. As a result, the facing distance between the protruding portions can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the space required for arrangement | positioning of a pair of wing | blade member can be suppressed. In other words, the pair of wing members can be disposed in a space equivalent to the space necessary for disposing the conventional product without projecting the projecting portion on the guide surface.

  In the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the interposition wall is positioned below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and positioned higher than the lower end of the entrance in the direction of gravity. Game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, in the open state, the upper surface of the interposition wall is located below the lower end of the guide surface in the direction of gravity and is further upward in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the entrance. Therefore, the game ball guided by the guide surface can be sent to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can be entered into the entrance by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is disposed at a position where the closed state is formed and the position at which the other wing member is formed at the closed state The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the timing to be played is different.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the timing at which one wing member of the pair of wing members is arranged at a position where the closed state is formed and the other wing member are Since the timing at which the closed state is formed is different, it is difficult to sandwich the game ball between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and the corresponding interval between the pair of wing members can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, the space required for disposing the pair of wing members can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a posture in which the guide surface faces the entrance, and in a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the entrance, and in an orientation with the guide surface as an upper surface. It is formed so as to be able to rotate between an open position that allows the game ball that rolls out on the front side of the entrance and allows the entrance of the game ball rolling on the guide surface, and the guide surface of the guide member is It is formed to have a width equal to or larger than the width of the entrance, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the entrance in a front view. In addition, the gaming machine A10 is characterized by being arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

  In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is in a position to be immersed below the entrance, and is in a closed position in which the game ball cannot enter the entrance and the orientation with the guide surface as an upper surface. The guide surface of the guide member is formed so as to be slidable between an open position that protrudes to the front side of the ball port and allows a game ball rolling on the guide surface to enter the ball entrance. A width equal to or larger than the width of the entrance hole is formed, and the pair of projecting portions are disposed at a position sandwiching the entrance opening in a front view. The gaming machine A11 is characterized by being arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface).

  According to the gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface of the guide member having a width equal to or greater than the width of the entrance. The pair of projecting portions formed are disposed at positions sandwiching the entrance in front view, and positioned in a direction orthogonal to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). Since they are arranged differently, the game ball guided (rolled) on the guide surface is brought into contact with the projecting portion, so that the game ball can be reliably biased. As a result, it is possible to smoothly enter the entrance.

  In addition, one projecting portion and the other projecting portion are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface). When a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be brought into contact with either one of the pair of projecting portions. Therefore, it can suppress that the game ball which approached the guide surface of the guide member from the width direction one side (or other side) flows out from the width direction other side of the guide surface of a guide member through the guide surface of a guide member. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by causing the game ball to enter the entrance.

<About the concept of the invention taking the winning prize unit 500 as an example>
A game entrance in which a game ball can be entered, a pair of wing members disposed so as to sandwich the entrance, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close them When the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the pair of wing members are disposed at an allowable position that allows the game ball to enter the entrance, and the pair of wing members are driven by the driving force of the driving means. In a gaming machine comprising a restricting means disposed at a restricting position for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entrance when the wing member is closed, the pair of wing members are closed or the pair The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the regulating means is formed so as to be maintained at the regulating position in a state where the wing member is opened from the outside.

  Here, a ball entrance that allows game balls to enter, a pair of wing members that are disposed across the ball entrance, and a driving force applied to the pair of wing members to open or close And a pair of wings by the driving force of the driving means, and when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the gaming means is allowed to enter the game ball. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine is known that includes a restricting unit that is disposed at a restricting position that restricts the entry of a game ball into the entrance when the member is closed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-172833).

  According to this gaming machine, when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the permissible position, so that the game balls that have passed between the pair of wing members are inserted into the entrance port. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, the restricting means is arranged at the restricting position, so that when the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside, the game ball is moved to the entrance. It is possible to regulate entering the ball.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted, for example, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricted position to the allowed position after the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside. Therefore, there has been a problem that the effect of restricting the illegal entry of game balls into the entrance is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the restricting means is formed so as to be maintained at the restricting position in a state where the pair of wing members are closed or the pair of wing members are opened from the outside. It is possible to suppress the means from being displaced to the allowable position. Accordingly, it is possible to easily restrict the game ball from being illegally entered into the entrance.

  Note that the restriction position for restricting the entry of the game ball into the entrance is that it is sufficient to stop the game ball at a predetermined position. That is, when the entrance is provided with a passage through which the game ball that flows into the entrance and passes through the entrance, the restricting position by the restricting means (the position at which the game ball is stopped) is more than the entrance entrance. It may be upstream or downstream of the entrance (that is, in the middle of a route flowing from the entrance and passing through the passage). In the latter case, the restriction position by the restriction means may be upstream of the detection means with respect to the detection means (detection sensor) disposed in the middle of the passage in order to detect the passage of the game ball. It may be downstream.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slid between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the driving force of the driving unit. The slide transmission member to be moved, and the slide transmission member that is rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement to the open slide position opens the pair of wing members and is closed by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position. A rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position and closes the pair of wing members, the restriction means is disposed on the slide transmission member, and the restriction is applied when the slide transmission member is slid to the open slide position. When the means is arranged at the allowable position and the slide transmission member is slid to the closed slide position, When the rotation transmission member is disposed at the open rotation position in a state where the restriction means is disposed at the restriction position and the slide transmission member is disposed at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are By being engaged, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position is restricted, and the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, when the rotation transmission member is disposed at the open rotation position with the slide transmission member disposed at the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are disposed. And the sliding displacement of the slide transmitting member to the open slide position is restricted, so that it is easy to restrict illegally entering the game ball into the entrance.

  That is, when the pair of closed wing members are forcibly opened from the outside illegally, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position with the slide transmission member disposed at the closed slide position. In such a state, the slide transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position. Therefore, the restriction means can be maintained at the restriction position (the restriction means is allowed). It is possible to prevent unauthorized displacement from the outside to the position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members are forcibly opened from the outside and the game ball is passed between the pair of wing members, the restriction means restricts the game ball from entering the entrance. it can.

  In the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove extends on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding projection protrudes from the other, and the sliding projection is slid along the sliding groove. As a result, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted to rotate the rotation transmission member, and the sliding projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, thereby releasing the slide transmission member. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that sliding displacement to the sliding position is restricted.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is extended on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding projection is projected from the other side. By sliding along the movement groove, the slide displacement of the slide transmission member is transmitted and the rotation transmission member is rotated, and the slide projection is engaged with the inner wall surface of the slide groove, thereby transmitting the slide. Since the slide displacement of the member to the open slide position is restricted, it is difficult to release the restriction while reducing the size.

  That is, a means for regulating the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the slide groove and the slide projection for transmitting the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the rotation transmission member for rotation. Since it is not necessary to separately provide such means at another location, the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by adopting a structure in which the sliding protrusion is engaged with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, unauthorized access from outside to the engaging portion can be made difficult, and the restriction (engagement) is released accordingly. It can be difficult.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the pair of wing members, and the transmission mechanism is slid between the open slide position and the closed slide position by the driving force of the driving unit. The slide transmission member to be moved, and the slide transmission member that is rotated to the open rotation position by the slide displacement to the open slide position opens the pair of wing members and is closed by the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position. A rotation transmission member that is rotated to a rotation position and at least capable of closing the pair of wing members, the regulating means is disposed on the rotation transmission member, and the rotation transmission member is rotated to an open rotation position. When the restricting means is disposed at the allowable position and the rotation transmitting member is rotated to the closed rotation position, the restricting means is In the state where the slide transmission member is arranged at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is arranged at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, A gaming machine B4, wherein the rotation transmitting member is restricted from rotating to an open rotation position.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, in a state where the slide transmission member is disposed at the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is disposed at the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member, the slide transmission member, Is engaged, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position is restricted, so that it is easy to restrict illegally entering the game ball into the entrance.

  That is, from a state where the pair of wing members is closed, for example, the pair of wing members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, or the rotation transmission member is directly operated to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position. Even if it tries to make it, since a rotation transmission member and a slide transmission member are engaged, rotation to the open rotation position of a rotation transmission member is controlled, Therefore A control means can be maintained in a control position (namely, control means) Can be prevented from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the permissible position). As a result, the illegally entering the game ball into the entrance can be regulated by the regulation means.

  In the gaming machine B4, a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engagement portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. A gaming machine B5, wherein the protruding portion protrudes along a direction of slide displacement of the slide transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, a protruding portion that protrudes from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member that can be engaged with the protruding portion. And the projecting portion is projected along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide transmission member, so that the engagement between the projecting portion and the engagement portion is performed using the slide displacement of the slide transmission member. And the release of the engagement can be switched, and the structure can be simplified.

  The engaging portion may be a surface (the other outer surface of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member) with which the protrusion can abut, or a hole or a recess (slide transmission member or rotation transmission) into which the protrusion can be inserted. It may be a hole drilled in one of the members or a recess recessed. In other words, any member that can regulate the rotation of the rotation transmitting member to the open rotation position by abutting the engaging portion with the engaging portion may be used. In this case, the engaging portion is preferably a hole or a recess. Since the protrusion is inserted into the engaging portion, the space required for the arrangement of the protruding portion can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced. This is because it can be shielded from the outside, and unauthorized access to the protruding portion from the outside can be made difficult.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, and an open-side contact portion that contacts and opens the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. A gaming machine B6, comprising: a closing-side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when closed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the rotation transmitting member is configured to contact the pair of wing members and open when they are rotated toward the opening rotation position. Since it has a closed side contact portion that contacts and closes the pair of wing members when rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, Unauthorized external access to the rotation transmission member or slide transmission member can be made difficult.

  In other words, when the wing member is displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening, the closing contact portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing member, and the rotation transmission member tries to rotate toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the engagement of the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member can regulate the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. It can be regulated by part. That is, it is possible to restrict the wing member from being displaced from the outside in the direction of forced opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being forcibly opened from the outside and to make unauthorized access from the outside to the rotation transmission member or the slide transmission member difficult.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, urging means for urging the pair of wing members in the closing direction is provided, and the rotation transmitting member contacts the pair of wing members when rotated toward the open rotation position. An opening-side contact portion that is opened and the pair of wing members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closed rotation position. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the gaming machine B7 includes biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the open rotation position. Since the pair of wing members are closed by the urging force of the urging means when the rotation transmitting member is rotated toward the closed rotation position. When the pair of wing members are illegally forcedly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members are not brought into contact with the rotation transmission member, and it is possible to avoid the external force due to the forcible opening being applied to the rotation transmission member. As a result, the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member can be prevented from being damaged.

  Examples of the urging means include a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction by an elastic recovery force, and a magnet that urges the pair of wing members in the closing direction by an attractive force. Is done.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the game machine includes a detection unit that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the regulation unit has the regulation position downstream of the detection unit, and A game machine B8, wherein the game ball is regulated at a position where detection by the detection means is possible.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the gaming machine B8 includes a detecting unit that detects a game ball that has entered the entrance, and the regulating unit has a regulated position downstream of the detecting unit. At the same time, the game ball is regulated at a position where detection by the detection means is possible. For example, when the wing member is forcibly opened and the game ball is illegally flowed from the entrance, the detection means detects the game ball. Can be continued. Therefore, by judging whether the detection by the detection means has been continued beyond the predetermined time, it is possible to detect that the game ball has been illegally introduced.

<About the concept of the invention taking the decorative symbol display device 800 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a first reel formed to be rotatable and a second reel that is disposed substantially concentrically inside the first reel and is formed to be rotatable. A first outer peripheral wall formed in a shape and a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, and the second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape and has an outer surface A second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and projecting radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall, and its outer surface is an inner surface of the first side wall And a second side wall opposed to the second side wall at a predetermined interval, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other. Machine C1.

  Here, a first reel formed rotatably and a second reel arranged substantially concentrically inside the first reel and formed rotatably (that is, a double reel structure). A gaming machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-230893). Also known is a technique for removing dust adhering to the display surface of the reel and cleaning it by bringing a rotating brush into contact with the outer peripheral surface (display surface) of the reel and causing the rotating member to follow the rotation of the reel. (For example, JP 2009-28241 A).

  However, the double reel structure has a problem that cleaning is difficult. That is, in the double reel structure, a space for disposing the rotating brush described above cannot be secured between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel), so the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. And the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel (second reel) cannot be cleaned.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel includes a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape, and a first side wall projecting radially inward from one axial direction side of the first outer peripheral wall. A second reel is formed in a cylindrical shape, and an outer surface of the second reel is opposed to the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined interval, and a diameter from one axial direction of the second outer peripheral wall. A second side wall that protrudes inward in the direction and has an outer surface facing the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined interval, and stands from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other side. Since the installation portion is erected, wind pressure is generated by displacing the erection portion in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Air between the inner surface of the outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can flow. Thereby, dust can be removed by the flow of air, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. That is, the double reel structure can be easily cleaned.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a surface continuous in the circumferential direction.

  Here, when an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall, or when a part in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall Since the wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction escapes from the opening portion and the divided portion, the wind pressure is weakened, and accordingly, the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall are reduced. It becomes difficult to flow the air between.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a surface that is continuous in the circumferential direction. The wind pressure generated when the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, the air between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can easily flow. As a result, using the wind pressure generated by the upright portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall It is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the outer surface.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel includes a first support wall that is pivotally supported at the center and supports the first side wall, and the second reel has a shaft that is rotatable at the center. A gaming machine C3 comprising a second support wall that is supported and supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall or the second support wall.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the supporting wall that supports the first side wall or the second supporting wall that supports the second side wall. Via the opening, the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall is exhausted to the outside, or the air is discharged from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. Can inhale. That is, the flow resistance of the air can be reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can easily flow (outflow or inflow) accordingly. As a result, using the wind pressure generated by the upright portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the second outer peripheral wall It is possible to facilitate the flow of air between the outer surface.

  In the gaming machine C3, when the upright portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the other of the first reel or the second reel The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that at least the opening is formed in the first support wall or the second support wall.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, when the standing portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of the first reel or the second reel, Since at least an opening is formed in the other first support wall or the second support wall of the second reel, it is possible to easily exert an effect of reducing flow resistance by exhausting or sucking air through the opening. . That is, when rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the standing portion is erected, the other of the openings formed on the opening is stopped, so that the air through the opening is stopped. The resistance of flow (exhaust or intake) can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the upright portion is erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall at different positions in the radial direction. C5.

  In the gaming machine C5, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, since the standing portions are erected on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall in different radial directions, the first reel Alternatively, regardless of which of the second reels is rotated, the upright portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to generate wind pressure. Therefore, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the effect by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to have light permeability, and a plurality of symbols are formed on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. A gaming machine C6, which is arranged along a circumferential direction, and wherein the standing portion is erected on a second side wall of the second reel.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a part of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed so as to be light transmissive, and the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel. Since the plurality of symbols are arranged along the circumferential direction, the player can visually recognize the variation of the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, since the standing portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the erected portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel that is rotated more times than the first reel. In the effect by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel, the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased.

<Concept of Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted; and a transmissive member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means. The transmissive member is formed in a curved shape, and the plurality of light emitting means are formed on the transmissive member. In a gaming machine arranged along a curve, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  Here, a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and a transmissive member that transmits light emitted from the light emitting means are formed, the transmissive member is curved, and the plurality of light emitting means are curved of the transmissive member. A gaming machine arranged along the line is known (for example, JP 2013-106672 A). In this case, the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at equal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (string) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by a plurality of light emitting means. However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means is biased because the interval between the light emitting means adjacent to some of the light emitting means is narrowed. Therefore, heat concentrates on some of the light emitting means, and the life is likely to be shortened.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the plurality of light emitting means are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, the distance between adjacent light emitting means in each light emitting means can be constant, and the distribution of heat generated by the light emitting means. Can be made uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from concentrating on some of the light emitting means and to improve the life of each light emitting means.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting unit toward the transmitting member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of section screens that are partitioned corresponding to the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the section widths of the plurality of section screens in the front view of the transmission member are set to be substantially the same.

  Here, when a plurality of light emitting units are arranged at equal intervals (that is, at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curve of the transmission member, the plurality of light emission units are arranged at unequal intervals in the front view of the transmission member. The Rukoto. That is, in the front view of the transmission member, a region where the interval between the light emitting means is narrow and a region where the light emitting unit is wide are formed. Therefore, the distribution of the amount of light becomes non-uniform along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transmitting member is provided, and the reflecting member corresponds to a plurality of light emitting means. The section widths of the plurality of section screens in the front view of the transmissive member are set to be substantially the same, so the light amount of each section screen visually recognized in the front view of the transmissive member is approximately Can be the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the light emitting surface of the light emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. For example, compared to the case where the light emitting surface is circular, Since diffusibility can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle), the distribution of the amount of light can be made uniform in one section screen.

  The light emitting surface means the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, the front-view rectangular shape of the light emitting surface means that the front-view shape of the encapsulating resin (front-view shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin) is rectangular.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in a direction in which one side of the light emitting surface is along a tangential direction in a curved shape of the transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, at least a part of the plurality of light emitting means is arranged in a direction along the tangential direction in the curved shape of the transmissive member, The light emitted from the light emitting means can be easily diffused uniformly along the curve of the transmission member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the transmission member can be made uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the section screen is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transmission member and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmission member, and the light emission surface of the light emitting means is the transmission surface A gaming machine D5, characterized by facing between the member and the section screen.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the section screen is formed as a curved surface that faces the back surface of the transmissive member and is recessed on the side away from the back surface of the transmissive member. Since the surface of the transparent member faces the section screen, the substrate can be disposed in a posture orthogonal to the transparent member. That is, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in disposing the unit including the transmission member, the substrate, and the reflection member. In this case, since the section screen is arranged in such a manner as to surround the light emitted from the light emitting surface of the light emitting means from the direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the light, the light reflected on the section screen is transmitted to the back surface of the transmissive member. Uniform incidence is possible. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the transmission member can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member includes a continuous surface that is continuous with the section screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface protrudes toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means. A gaming machine D6, which is formed as a curved surface.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5, the reflecting member includes a continuous surface that is connected to the section screen and faces the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the continuous surface is the light emitting means. Therefore, the light reflected by the continuous surface can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the transmissive member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that can be seen through the transmission member can be made uniform.

<Concept of Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A rotating drum formed in a rotatable manner and a plurality of which are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval; and a decorative member that is disposed between the plurality of rotating drums and has at least a part being light transmissive. And a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and disposed on the back side of the decorative member, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. The gaming machine E1 provided with a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member.

  Here, a rotating drum formed in a rotatable manner and a plurality of which are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and disposed between the plurality of rotating drums, and at least a part thereof is light transmissive. A decorative member and a substrate disposed on the back side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted are provided, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. A gaming machine to be installed is known (for example, JP 2013-5927 A). According to this gaming machine, not only can the space between the spinning cylinders be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also the pattern on the surface of the decorative member is formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means that has passed through the decorative member, An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the design of the decorative member integrally with the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum can be performed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the substrate is disposed in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member, the light emitted from the light emitting means is sufficiently applied to the back surface of the decorative member. The pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means cannot be made sufficiently large. For this reason, there is a problem that the production effect is insufficient. On the other hand, if the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is enlarged while the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means is small, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the reflection member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member is provided, the posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. Even in the case where the substrate is provided, the irradiation range on the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light emitting means can be widened. Accordingly, the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be increased accordingly, and the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light emitting means can be increased, the area excluding the pattern can be reduced, so that a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum can be formed.

  In the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is located on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and has an outer edge extending to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in a front view. Characteristic gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the decorative member is positioned on the front side of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and the outer edge extends to a position overlapping the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in front view. Since it is formed to be extended, it is easy to shield the axial end face of the rotating drum from the player (it is difficult to see). In addition, the design of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light emitting means and the design displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum can be brought closer to each other. It is easy to form a bodily experience.

  In the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the area on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and the design on the decorative member A gaming machine E3 that surrounds a region to be formed, and that the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted on the substrate and the back surface of the decorative member, so that the area on which the light emitting means is mounted on the substrate And the area of the decorative member on which the pattern is formed, and the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate. While ensuring the size of the pattern formed (displayed), the back of the decorative member is brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum, and the rotating drum is inserted into the back side of the decorative member (the rotating drum is a substrate). To be close). As a result, it is possible to easily shield (is difficult to visually recognize) the axial end surface of the rotating drum from the player, and to easily form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the board.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the light emitting means is mounted on both the one side surface and the other side surface of the board. Different designs can be independently formed (displayed) on the decorative member depending on the light emitted from the means and the light emitted from the light emitting means mounted on the other surface.

  In this case, the number of substrates disposed between the rotating cylinders arranged side by side can be one. Therefore, since the space required for arrangement | positioning of a board | substrate can be suppressed, it can be made to enter into the back | inner side of the back surface of a decoration member by that much (rotator is brought close to a board | substrate). As a result, it is possible to easily shield (is difficult to visually recognize) the axial end surface of the rotating drum from the player, and to easily form a sense of unity between the decorative member and the rotating drum.

<Concept of Invention Taking Segment Display Device 600 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are arranged opposite to each other and are formed to be displaceable in directions close to or away from each other, and are formed to be displaceable in the same direction with the opposite sides in contact with each other And a base member, and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that support the first displacement member and the second displacement member so that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaceable on the base member, respectively. The second displacement that is biased to one side of the opposite side of the first displacement member and that is opposite to the other side of the second side of the second displacement member that contacts the one side of the first side of the first displacement member The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the member.

  Here, there are provided a first displacement member and a second displacement member which are arranged to be opposed to each other and can be displaced in the direction of approaching or separating from each other and can be displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other. There are known gaming machines (for example, JP 2013-106844 A). According to such a gaming machine, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are brought close to a position where the opposing sides come into contact with each other, so that an object (for example, the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member (for example, The liquid crystal display device and the production member) are shielded, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in directions away from each other, so that the shield is released along with the displacement and the object can be visually recognized. It is possible to produce an effect. Further, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced in the same direction (for example, reciprocal displacement in one direction and the other direction) in a state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other, while maintaining shielding of the object. Further, it is possible to perform an effect before the cancellation of the shielding (effect that focuses attention on the cancellation operation of the shielding).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is difficult to closely contact the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the constituent members. There is a problem that a gap may be formed. If a gap is formed between the opposing sides, the player can visually recognize the object on the back side through the gap, and the effect of the effect is hindered.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine F1 includes a base member, and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that support the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be displaceable on the base member, respectively. The support mode of the mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that is in contact with one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Since the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased to one side of the opposing side of the second displacement member, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, The support mode and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated by 180 ° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposite side). Thereby, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode in which the support state is biased to one side, for example, one side and the other side have different structural member rigidity (dimensions, number of components, material, etc.), one side and the other side Different driving forces (for example, size, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) are transmitted from one side to the other, and the connection state (for example, the number of connected parts, the number of connected parts) between one side and the other side is different. The amount of slack is different, and the ease of displacement to the other side (biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (slide or rotation), etc.) is different A combination of these is exemplified.

  Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are configured such that their own rigid side (low side) is compared with the counterpart low rigidity side (high side). ). Therefore, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes in (moves forward) the other side on the high rigidity side, On the side of low rigidity, a state of accepting (retracting) the opponent can be formed. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first drive unit that generates a driving force, a pair of first connection members that connect the first displacement member to the base member, and the pair of first connection members. A first transmission member and a first other transmission member configured to transmit the driving force of the first driving means to each other and different from each other, and the second support mechanism generates a driving force. Two driving means, a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a structure that transmits the driving force of the second driving means to the pair of second connecting members and that is different from each other. A gaming machine F2 comprising a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first driving unit that generates a driving force, and a pair of first coupling members that couple the first displacement member to the base member. The first support member includes a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the driving force of the first driving means to the pair of first connection members, respectively, and the second support mechanism includes: A second driving means for generating a driving force; a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member; and the driving force of the second driving means is transmitted to the pair of second connecting members, respectively. Since the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission member that are configured differently are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and there is a gap between the opposing sides. It can suppress forming.

  In other words, in the state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism has, for example, a higher driving force side or a driving force transmission timing. While the other side is pushed in (moves forward) on the front side, a state in which the other side is accepted (retreats) can be formed on the side where the driving force is small or on the later side. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  Here, as an aspect in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are different from each other, for example, the rigidity (configuration of the component members) Examples include those with different member dimensions, number of arrangements, materials, etc., components with different connection states (for example, the number of connection parts, amount of rattling of connection parts, etc.), and combinations thereof. Is done. That is, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the transmission timing differ depending on the difference in these configurations, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is the base member. A game machine F3 that is rotatably supported on the same axis.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have substantially the same length, and one end side is the first displacement member or the second displacement member. Since the other end side is connected to the member and is pivotally supported on the base member so as to be coaxially rotatable, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other. At this time, even when the bias of the support mode is used, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first connecting member or the second connecting member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are disposed between opposing sides. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state when the two are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, at least one of the first coupling member or the second coupling member is provided with an elastic body formed of a rubber-like elastic material, and the first displacement member In the state where the second displacement member abuts the opposing sides, the elastic body is interposed in an elastically compressed state between the first connection member and the second connection member. When the second displacement member is reciprocated in the same direction while abutting the opposing sides, the state in which the opposing sides are in contact can be easily maintained even when the bias of the support mode is used.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates a driving force and the first driving means, and connects the first displacement member to the base member. A pair of first connecting members; a first one-side biasing member that applies different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members; and a first other-side biasing member, wherein the second support mechanism is driven Second driving means for generating force, a pair of second connecting members driven by the second driving means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second connecting members, respectively. A gaming machine F5 comprising a second one-side urging member and a second other-side urging member for applying an urging force.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates the driving force, the first driving means, and the first driving mechanism. A pair of first connecting members that connect the displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side biasing member and a first other-side biasing member that apply different biasing forces to the pair of first connecting members, The second support mechanism includes a second driving unit that generates a driving force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving unit and that connect the second displacement member to the base member, and the pair of second connecting units. Since the second one-side urging member and the second other-side urging member that apply different urging forces to the two connecting members are provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other. A gap is formed between the opposing sides. Rukoto can be suppressed.

  That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the opponent (progresses, for example, on the side with a large biasing force). ) And a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent on the side having a small urging force. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  The first one-side biasing member and the first other-side biasing member may have the same configuration. That is, the biasing force applied to each of the pair of first connecting members may be different by changing the position at which the biasing force is applied, or by different elastic deformation amounts. The same applies to the second one-side biasing member and the second other-side biasing member.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates a driving force and the first driving means, and connects the first displacement member to the base member. A pair of first connecting members; and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members, wherein the second support mechanism generates a driving force. And a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a second that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members. A gaming machine F6 comprising two urging members.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism is driven by the first driving means that generates the driving force, the first driving means, and the first driving mechanism. A pair of first connecting members for connecting the displacement member to the base member; and a first biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members. Attached to one of the pair of second connecting members and a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second driving means and connect the second displacement member to the base member. Since the second urging member for applying the force is provided, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacing member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  That is, in a state where the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other, each of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism pushes the other party on the side on which the urging force is applied, for example ( It is possible to form a state of accepting (retreating) the opponent on the side where the urging force is not applied. As a result, the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the first displacement member is close to the second displacement member. One of the first torsion springs as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. A gaming machine F7, wherein at least one of a connecting position between the leg and the first connecting member or a connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the first displacement member is formed as a torsion spring and one leg is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member. Since the first torsion spring is provided to apply a biasing force in the direction in which the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member, the first connection member is rotated when the first displacement member is displaced in the direction closer to the second displacement member. The driving force of the first driving means required for making it possible can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Thus, for example, when the first displacement member is displaced from the stopped state from the retracted position separated from the second displacement member from the stop position, the displacement can be started smoothly. it can.

  In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member, the connection position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connection member or the first torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding part, the distance from the winding part to the position where the force is applied is increased, so that the first displacement member approaches the second displacement member. The urging force in the direction to be made can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member brought close to the second displacement member is stopped, the displacement can be stopped reliably, so that the damage caused by the collision can be suppressed. In addition, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed. Can be improved and the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F7, formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is brought close to the first displacement member. A second torsion spring that applies a biasing force to the first displacement member, and one leg of the second torsion spring as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. A gaming machine F8, wherein at least one of a connection position between the first connection member and the second connection member or a connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is separated from the winding portion.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in the gaming machine F7. In particular, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force required for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Become. In addition, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are the same height (arranged at the position in the gravitational direction), the position where they abut is the highest position (or the lowest position) in the gravitational direction, and the two are separated from each other. The configuration of the gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the position to be retreated (retreat position) is the lowest position (or the highest position) in the direction of gravity.

  In the gaming machine F7, the first displacement member is brought close to the second displacement member by the upward displacement in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member by the upward displacement in the gravity direction. The urging force in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced upward in the gravitational direction can be strengthened as the position is increased (that is, in the direction in which the first displacement member is displaced upward in the gravitational direction as the first displacement member is positioned upward in the gravity direction). Can be weakened).

  Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced (raised) from the stopped state toward the upper side in the gravitational direction, the displacement (rise) can be started smoothly and the raised first displacement member is stopped. In this case, the displacement can be stopped reliably by not only the action of gravity but also the urging force is weakened. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage accompanying the collision with the second displacement member. On the other hand, when stopping the first displacement member displaced (lowered) downward in the gravitational direction, the biasing force is strengthened, so that the biasing force counters the action of the gravity that continues to descend. be able to. As a result, the first displacement member can be reliably stopped.

  In the gaming machine F9, formed as a torsion spring, one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member. A second torsion spring for applying an urging force to the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by a displacement upward in a gravitational direction, and the second displacement member is moved to the first displacement member. As the second connecting member is rotated in the direction of approaching, the connecting position of one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member The gaming machine F10 is characterized in that at least one of the connecting positions is spaced from the winding portion.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9, one leg is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg is connected to the base member, and the second displacement member is formed as a torsion spring. A second torsion spring that applies a biasing force in a direction away from the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the upward displacement in the gravitational direction; When the first connecting member is displaced in the direction away from the first displacing member, that is, when the second displacing member needs to be displaced (raised) against the direction of gravity. The driving force of the two driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

  In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in the direction in which the second displacement member is brought closer to the first displacement member, the connection position of one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the second torsion spring Since at least one of the connecting positions of the other leg and the base member is separated from the winding portion, the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by the length of the distance from the winding portion to the force application position. The urging force in the direction (the direction of raising upward in the direction of gravity) can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides in contact with each other, the driving force necessary for the reciprocal displacement can be suppressed. The displacement speed can be increased, and the production effect can be improved.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.
In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board 140 Second winning entrance (entrance entrance)
15065 Variable winning device (guide member)
15065a Side (guide surface)
15065b bulging part (projecting part)
15065c bulging part (projecting part)
65a specific winning opening 510 base member 511b2 engaging portion (regulating portion)
511b1 standing part (intervening wall)
520 1st electric accessory (guide member)
520L wing member 520R wing member 524L bulging portion (projecting portion)
524R bulging part (projecting part)
526L Side (guide surface)
526R Side (guide surface)
531 Solenoid (drive means)
532 Second projection (regulating means)
532, 8532 Sliding member (slide transmitting member)
532d Engaging groove (sliding groove)
8532e 3rd protrusion (protrusion)
533, 7533, 8533, 9533 Rotating member (Rotating transmission member)
533a Connection part (engagement part)
533b Protrusion (sliding protrusion)
8533e 2nd protrusion (regulation means)
621 Light transmission member (transmission member, decoration member)
624 Base material (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 reflective member 625a1 reflective surface (continuous surface)
625b Concavity (ward screen)
660 Base member 672U Displacement member (first displacement member)
672D Displacement member (second displacement member)
680U drive means (first support mechanism)
680D driving means (second support mechanism)
684U 1st link member (1st one side transmission member)
684D 1st link member (2nd one side transmission member)
686U 2nd link member (1st other side transmission member)
686U 2nd link member (2nd other side transmission member)
800 Decorative design display (turning)
810 Inner reel unit (second reel)
811 Inner reel (second outer peripheral wall)
812 Hub (second side wall)
812a1 protrusion (standing part)
812c spoke (second support wall)
812c1 inner opening (opening)
5813a Protrusion (standing part)
820 Outer reel unit (first reel)
821 Outer reel (first outer peripheral wall)
822 spoke (first support wall)
824 edge (first side wall)
3824a Protrusion (standing part)
825 Outside opening (opening)
SP1 Torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 Torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

Claims (3)

A rotating drum formed in a rotatable manner and a plurality of which are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval; and a decorative member that is disposed between the plurality of rotating drums and has at least a part being light transmissive. And a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted and disposed on the back side of the decorative member, and the substrate is arranged in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the back surface of the decorative member. In the installed gaming machine,
A gaming machine comprising a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means to a back surface of the decorative member.   The said decoration member is formed by extending an outer edge to a position overlapping with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum in front view, while being positioned in front of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating drum. The gaming machine according to 1.   The reflective member connects a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and a back surface of the decorative member, so that an area on the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and an area on which the design on the decorative member is formed The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the rotating drum as it goes from the decorative member to the substrate.

Images